JP7227590B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention comprises a game area in which game balls can flow down, executes a game based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening provided in the game area, and when the result of the game is a special result. , relates to a game machine that generates a special game state advantageous to a player.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) are displayed on a variable display device provided in the game area based on the winning of a game ball in a starting hole provided in the game area (start winning). ) is started, and when the mode of the plurality of pieces of identification information stopped after the elapse of a predetermined time is a predetermined special result mode, a special result mode in which a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. Some are in a game state. Among such gaming machines, there is also known a game machine equipped with a normal variable prize winning device that changes the ease of winning a prize to the starting port by varying the operation mode of the movable member (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-121302 A

However, the purpose of the movement of the movable member is only to increase the number of prizes won at the starting gate and to make it possible to execute a plurality of variable display games in a short period of time. It wasn't. An object of the present invention is to improve the amusement of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
Equipped with a game area where game balls can flow down, a game is executed based on the winning of game balls into the start winning opening provided in the game area, and if the result of the game is a special result, the player In a gaming machine that generates an advantageous special game state,
Equipped with game control means for comprehensively controlling the game,
In the game area,
A normal variable prize winning device that forms the starting prize winning port and can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize;
and a second start prize opening forming the start prize opening,
The normal variable winning device and the second starting winning port are arranged on the same flow path of the game ball so that they can be aimed at the same time, and the normal variable winning device is on the upstream side of the second starting winning port. located in
The game control means is
executing a first game as the game based on the winning of a game ball to the normal variable winning device;
executing a second game as the game based on the winning of the game ball into the second start winning port;
The first game and the second game can be executed simultaneously,
The special results include a first special result and a second special result,
The probability that the result of the game will be the first special result is the same probability in the first game and the second game, and is either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state. can be set to
The probability that the result of the game will be the second special result is the same probability in either the low-probability state or the high-probability state,
when the first game and the second game are being executed, one game is stopped with a losing result based on the second special result of the other game;
The second game has a higher probability of the second special result than the first game,
A normal pattern variation display game is executed in which the identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined variation time and then stopped based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a specific result, the normal variation configured to transform the winning device from the closed state to the open state;
The operating state of the normal variable winning device can be set to either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than in the first operating state,
when the high-probability state is the second operation state, switching between the first zone and the second zone is possible based on the establishment of a predetermined condition ;
In the second zone, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning port than in the first zone,
The variation time of the second game, which is the second special result in the high probability state, is longer than the variation time of the normal pattern variation display game in the first zone, and the variation time of the normal pattern variation display game in the second zone. It is characterized by being shorter than the fluctuation time .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining a normal variable winning device. It is a figure explaining the modification of a normal variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of a normal variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a front view of a special variable winning device. It is a top view of a special variable winning device. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of an opening-and-closing member, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a figure explaining the rolling mode of the game ball in the special variable winning device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the operation of the normal variable winning device and various times. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening-and-closing pattern of a special variable prize-winning device. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting port 1 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure starting port 3 switch processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flowchart for explaining support management processing; It is a flow chart explaining jackpot flag 1 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining a process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart for explaining a process transition setting process 2 during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining the process transition setting process 2 during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a fanfare/interval process transition setting process; It is a flow chart for explaining processing transition setting processing during the special figure 1 small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart for explaining processing transition setting processing during special figure 2 small hit fanfare. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flow chart for explaining a large winning opening remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining processing during a small hit. It is a flowchart explaining small hit residual ball processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure usual processing. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; It is a figure explaining a normal figure fluctuation pattern. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the mode of execution of the normal figure fluctuation display game and the mode of execution of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect on a display device; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect on a display device; FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of a shooting direction indication display. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the execution mode, such as a special figure fluctuation display game, and the execution mode of a firing direction instruction display. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the execution mode, such as a special figure fluctuation display game, and the execution mode of a firing direction instruction display.

<First embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the game machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, which is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. is changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper tray 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a batted ball shooting device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 for flowing out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls dispensed when the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation section 24 for a ball shooting device are provided. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with a performance button 25 incorporating a performance button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 for receiving contact operation input from the player. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .
In this embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Also, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation portion 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front side of the game board 30. fire. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect etc. that intervened the operation of the player are performed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 80 that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 80 . The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path rolls. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the first starting prize winning port 36, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 620 easily enters the first starting prize winning port 36.例文帳に追加A board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 40 to effect a game effect by operating it. This board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 19) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the right part of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning holes 35 is detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 19) provided in the general winning holes 35. FIG.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a first start winning port 36 (first start winning area) that provides a condition for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). . A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 19). In addition, in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40, a second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) that provides a condition for starting the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is provided. It is A game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 19).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 , a normal variable prize winning device 37 is provided between the normal pattern start gate 34 and the second start prize winning port 97 . In this embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory (first start memory ) are stored. That is, in the present embodiment, the winning opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (general electric winning opening 37d) is the first starting winning area that provides the starting condition for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game). be. Then, the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 19), and when the game ball is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a, the game control device 100 The special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed, or the special figure 1 start prize memory is stored. Thus, in the present embodiment, the general power winning opening 37d and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to the first starting winning area (starting opening of special figure 1), and the second starting winning opening 97 corresponds to the second starting It corresponds to the winning area (starting port of special figure 2).

A game control device (game control means) 100 controls a movable member 37b of a normal fluctuation winning device 37 between an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of a normal pattern fluctuation display game. (conversion control means) (see FIG. 19). Although the details of the configuration of the normal variable winning device 37 will be described later, in the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is advanced and retreated (slid) in the front and rear direction by the universal electric solenoid 37c, thereby It is a so-called tongue type ordinary electric accessory that opens the mouth 37d (puts the game ball in a state that can flow into the ordinary electric winning prize mouth 37d). As the movable member 37b of the normal variable prize winning device 37, for example, an attacker-type normal electric accessory that opens the normal electric prize opening 37d by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls forward by a normal electric solenoid 37c is provided. may The game control device 100 opens the movable member 37b via the general electric solenoid 37c to allow the game ball to flow into the normal variable prize winning device 37 when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. open state.

In addition, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or making the hit probability of the normal pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, or normal A time-saving state (general electric support (electricity support) state) is generated by making the generation time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the game state.

A special variable winning device 38 is provided in the game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40 . As shown in FIGS. 15 to 18, the special variable prize winning device 38 converts the large prize winning opening 38d into a state in which game balls can flow in by sliding the opening/closing member 990 forward and backward. The special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening 38d from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening 38d. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is awarded to the player. A game ball winning the special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 19).

That is, the special variable winning device 38 of the present embodiment opens and closes from a closed state in which the opening/closing member 990 closes the big winning opening 38d (closed state disadvantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game. The member 990 is retracted and converted to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) capable of receiving game balls flowing down the game area 32 . Then, the game ball arriving at the special variable winning device 38 is repeatedly guided diagonally backward by the front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 and guided diagonally forward by the recessed portion 993 and the rear wall projecting portion 964, It flows from right to left while meandering back and forth. As a result, the game ball stays on the opening/closing member 990 for a longer time than in the case where the downflow path 38f does not have undulations such as the front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, the protrusion 992, and the recess 993, and flows straight down. become longer. Therefore, the game ball always exists on the opening/closing member 990, and even if the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short, the game ball exists on the opening/closing member 990 when the opening/closing member 990 is opened. There is a high possibility that the will fall and enter the big winning opening 38d, and even if it is opened for a short time, the player can have a feeling of anticipation for winning.

In addition, when the opening and closing member 990 is opened, the game ball staying on the opening and closing member 990 bounces by coming into contact with the projecting portion 992 and is guided away from the big winning opening 38d. Also, the bounced game ball may contact the front wall protrusion 954 of the channel front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the channel rear wall 962, and the like, and may further leave the big winning opening 38d. In addition, since the projecting portions 992 are arranged at intervals through which the game balls can pass, the game balls may fall through this interval without coming into contact with the projecting portions 992 . By providing the projecting portion 992, the front wall projecting portion 954, and the rear wall projecting portion 964 in this manner, the game ball rolls in a variety of ways when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can. In addition, when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening/closing member 990 into the large winning opening 38d can be shifted, and ball clogging can occur in the large winning opening 38d. can be prevented. The configuration for retaining game balls in the normal variable winning device 37, which will be described later, may be used as the configuration for retaining game balls in the special variable winning device 38, or conversely, the game balls in the special variable winning device 38 may be used. may be used as a configuration for retaining game balls in the normal variable prize winning device 37 .

Returning to FIG. 2, in the game area 32 below the first starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win a winning opening is provided. In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided.

The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 indicator (first special figure variation display unit) 51 for a special figure 1 variation display game composed of a 7-segment type indicator (LED lamp) etc. and a special figure 2 variation display It has a special figure 2 display for the game (second special figure variation display unit) 52 and a memory display unit 53 for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 1 variation display game composed of LED lamps.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a round display section 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big win (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning device 38), and a method of beating that is advantageous to the player, either left-handed (normally) or right-handed. A first game state display section 56 for notifying (playing method corresponding to the game state) and a probability display section 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a probability state display unit for displaying that the probability state of the big win is high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and a display that lights up when the big win occurs to notify the occurrence of the big win. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.

In addition, a normal pattern display unit 58 that displays the normal pattern fluctuation display game, a memory display unit 59 for notifying the number of start memories of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and a time saving state that lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the time saving state occurrence A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The flashing period is set to 100 ms, for example. In the case of this embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51, in addition to the central segment, the 8th segment provided on the lower right side of the 7 segments is also blinked. It is configured to display that it is fluctuating, and to distinguish between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "losing", for example, the center segment (if it is a special figure 1, the 8th segment on the lower right side) is lit as a result of losing, and the result of the game is In the case of a "hit", the game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the win (special result mode).

The memory display unit 53 is the first start winning port 36, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display device 51, and the number of undigested balls among the number of winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (starting memory number = pending number) is displayed by extinguishing and lighting (blinking) of a plurality of LEDs. The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when the special game state is not in progress, all the LEDs are turned off, and in the special game state, the LEDs are turned on corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. turn it on. The round display section 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

The first game state display unit 56 turns off all the LEDs in the case where the game is determined to proceed with the game by, for example, hitting to the left (at the time of normal hitting), and the game is played by hitting to the right. (when hitting right), all the LEDs are turned on. The probability display unit 57 turns off all the LEDs when the probability state of the big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state), and turns off all the LEDs when the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (variable probability state). lights up.

FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 30 included in the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped game board main body 80, a front component 600 forming a front portion of the center case 40, and a rear portion of the center case 40, and a game board. and a rear structural member 700 to which various members necessary for the board 30 are attached. The rear structural member 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess opening forward, and inside the recess is a board effect device 44 that performs game effects by operating. , Various movable accessory units are provided.

The front structural member 600 is provided with the general winning opening 35, the warp flow path forming member 614, the stage section 620, and the like. In addition to the front constituent member 600, the game board main body 80 includes a normal figure starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a first starting winning opening 36, a second starting winning opening 97, a normal variable winning device 37, a special variable A winning device 38, a collective display device 50, and the like are provided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, on the right side of the normal variable prize winning device 37, a downflow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed, and the winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is formed. A game ball that failed in (specifically, a game ball that did not win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37 even though it reached the normal variable prize winning device 37) flows downward through the downflow path 615.例文帳に追加A guiding portion 616 is provided below the flow-down passage 615 . The guide portion 616 has an upper surface 617 that slopes down to the left, and the game ball that flows down the downflow path 615 is received by the upper surface 617, and the second start winning opening 97 and the special variable winning device 38 are present. It is designed to guide you to the left.

[Normal Variable Winning Device]
Next, an example of the configuration of the normal variable winning device 37 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 12. FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the normal variable winning device 37. As shown in FIG. 5(a) is a top view of the normal variable winning device 37 with the movable member 37b closed, and FIG. 5(b) is a top view of the normal variable winning device 37 with the movable member 37b open. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 5, the normal variable winning device 37 includes a channel rear wall 373a arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and a channel front wall 371a arranged in front of the channel rear wall 373a. It is provided with a downflow path 37f sandwiched between and in which game balls can flow down in a line. The downflow path 37f is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front side, so that the game balls flow down rightward in a line. In addition, the normal variable prize winning device 37 allows game balls to pass in a line inside the normal variable prize winning device 37 (specifically, inside the base portion configured by the front base member 373 and the rear base member 375). A substantially U-shaped detour 37g is provided. As shown in FIG. 4, an inlet 37g1 (one end of the detour 37g) and an outlet 37g2 (the other end of the detour 37g) of the detour 37g are formed in the flow path rear wall 373a, and the game ball flow into the detour 37g from the downstream channel 37f one by one via the inlet 37g1, and flow out from the detour 37g to the downstream channel 37f one by one via the outlet 37g2.

As shown in FIG. 4, the channel front wall 371a has a protruding portion 371b that protrudes rearward and penetrates the channel rear wall 373a. The protruding portion 371b is located between the entrance 37g1 and the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, where the game balls flowing down the downflow path 37f collide. Therefore, the projecting portion 371b prevents the game ball from flowing down the downflow path 37f on the way (that is, before it flows into the end point (downstream end) of the downflow path 37f), thereby allowing the game ball to enter the detour 37g. It is designed to induce Since the projecting portion 371b is provided in the middle of the downflow path 37f, the game ball cannot flow into the end point of the downflow path 37f unless it passes through the detour 37g.

As shown in FIG. 5, the bottom surfaces of the central portion and the right end portion of the downflow passage 37f and the bottom surface of the bypass passage 37g are formed by a movable member 37b that can slide in the front-rear direction. The movable member 37b protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 5(a) and is in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the normal variable winning device 37 (general electrical winning opening 37d), and a closed state shown in FIG. 5(b). It is possible to convert to an open state in which a game ball can win in the general electric winning opening 37d by retreating backward. That is, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b and cannot flow into the general electricity winning opening 37d, and the movable member 37b is in the open state. In the case of , it is possible to flow into the general electric prize winning opening 37d.

Specifically, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. That is, it flows down the downflow path 37f to the projection 371b, collides with the projection 371b, and flows into the detour 37g. In addition, when the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 37b collides with the projecting portion 371b, or when the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f flows into the upper surface of the movable member 37b When the movable member 37b is in the open state at the time of the game, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g.

Moreover, the game ball which passed through 37 g of detours and flowed into the terminal point of 37 f of flow-down paths flows into 37 d of general electric prize-winning openings, when the movable member 37b is an open state. On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed through the detour 37g and has flowed into the end point of the downflow path 37f does not flow into the normal electric winning opening 37d, and the normal variable winning device 37 It advances to the outside and flows down to the guide section 616 through the downflow path 615 , for example. That is, the game ball corresponds to a game ball that failed to win a prize to the normal variable winning device 37 (a game ball that did not win a prize to the normal variable winning device 37 despite arriving at the normal variable winning device 37). . In addition, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, there is a gap between the movable member 37b and the flow path front wall 371a, but the gap is such that game balls cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 4, the normal variable winning device 37 includes a starting port 2 switch 37a, and a movable member unit 374 having a movable member 37b and a normal solenoid 37c. Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 includes a front decoration member 371 having a channel front wall 371a, a front base member 373 having a channel rear wall 373a, a rear base member 375 to which the movable member 37b and the like are attached, and a rear base. A rear cover member 377 covering the rear surface of the member 375, a front LED substrate 372a and a front substrate holder 372 for fixing the front LED substrate 372a to the rear surface of the front decoration member 371, a rear LED substrate 376a and the rear LED substrate 376a. and a rear substrate holder 376 for fixing to the rear surface of the rear base member 375 .

At least the front decoration member 371, the front base member 373, and the rear base member 375 are made of a material that can transmit light. A front LED board 372a is arranged as decoration means behind the front decoration member 371, and a rear LED board 376a is arranged as decoration means behind the rear base member 375. can be decorated.

The front decoration member 371 has a plate-shaped front surface portion 371c. The front surface of the front surface portion 371c is arranged close to the rear surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that game balls are prevented from flowing down in front of this front surface. The front surface of the front surface portion 371c is visible to the player and is decorated. Further, the upper portion of the plate-like front surface portion 371c serves as a channel front wall 371a forming a side wall on the front side of the downstream channel 37f.

As shown in FIG. 5, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) upstream front wall protrusions 371d protruding rearward are provided on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a. The upstream front wall projection 371d is a triangular prism-shaped projection with slanted left and right side surfaces. The upstream front wall protrusion 371d has a function of guiding backward the game ball flowing down to the right in order to make the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f meander and suppress the power of the game. That is, it forms a contact portion that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a downstream front wall protrusion 371e that protrudes rearward is provided on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a. The downstream front wall projection 371e is a triangular prism-shaped projection with slanted left and right side surfaces. The downstream front wall protrusion 371e has a function of guiding backward the game ball flowing rightward in order to make the game ball flowing into the end point of the downflow passage 37f meander and suppress the power of the game. That is, it forms a contact portion that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f. Furthermore, the downstream front wall protrusion 371e allows game balls that flow down around the normal variable winning device 37 (outside the normal variable winning device 37) to enter the normal variable winning device 37 on the downstream side (flow path 37f). end point side).

FIG. 6(a) is a back view of the front decoration member 371. FIG. As shown in FIG. 6(a), the rear side of the front decoration member 371 is provided with a plurality of rib-shaped extension walls 371f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped front surface portion 371c. The extension wall 371f has a different function depending on where it is provided. A general electric prize-winning opening formation portion 371f2 forming a side wall and a bottom surface of the general electric prize-winning opening 37d, a guidance passage forming portion 371f3 forming a guidance passage 37e for guiding a game ball that has entered the general electric prize-winning opening 37d, and a starting opening 2 switch. It has a function as a switch mounting portion forming portion 371f4 forming a mounting portion for mounting 37a, and a surrounding wall 371f5 for preventing game balls flowing down around the normal variable winning device 37 from entering the inside.

A bottom surface portion 371f1 that forms the bottom surface of the downflow passage 37f is an inclined surface that inclines leftward when viewed from the rear surface side. The general electric prize-winning opening formation part 371f2 inclines so that the game ball which flowed into the general electric prize-winning opening 37d may be gathered to the guidance flow path 37e. Game balls can flow into the guide channel 37e in a row, and a starting port 2 switch 37a is provided at the inflow portion of the guide channel 37e. As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the general electric winning prize port 37d are detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a and then flow into the induction flow path 37e. The guide flow path 37e formed by the guide flow path forming portion 371f3 is a flow path that guides the game ball from the general electric prize opening 37d to the rear surface side of the game board 30, and the game ball is placed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 371c. A rib 371g is formed for guiding backward.

The front LED board 372a and the front board holder 372 are disposed on the rear surface of the front decoration member 371 inside the peripheral wall 371f5 (the portion surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5). A portion of the rear surface of the front decoration member 371 surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5 is processed to scatter light (uneven processing in the example shown in FIG. 6A). As a result, it is possible to effectively decorate the normal variable winning device 37 with the light from the front LED board 372a and the rear LED board 376a. It is difficult to see through the front decoration member 371 from the front of the member 371 . Further, as shown in FIG. 6(b), the lower part of the front base member 373 has a plurality of holes (seven in the example shown in FIG. 6(b)) for releasing heat from the front LED substrate 372a and the like. is provided. These holes are also difficult to see from the front of the front decoration member 371 due to the light scattering processing applied to the front decoration member 371 .

As shown in FIG. 4, the front base member 373 has a plate-like rear surface portion 373b. A front decoration member 371 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b, and the portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b that is not covered by the front decoration member 371 is decorated. The upper portion of the rear surface portion 373b serves as a channel rear wall 373a forming a rear side wall of the downstream channel 37f. A movable member inserting portion 373c is formed at the lower end of the flow path rear wall 373a so as to pass through the front base member 373 from the rear surface side of the movable member 37b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front side of the front base member 373 is provided with a plurality of (two in this embodiment) rear wall projections 373d projecting forward. The rear wall projections 373d are triangular prism-shaped projections with slanted left and right side surfaces. It is provided so as to be positioned slightly downstream with respect to the protrusion 371d. The rear wall protrusion 373d has a function of guiding forward the game ball flowing down to the right in order to suppress the power of the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f by meandering the game ball. That is, it forms a contact portion that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f.

6B is a back view of the front base member 373. FIG. As shown in FIG. 6(b), in a central portion of the rear surface portion 373b and facing the portion where the guide flow path 37e is formed in the front decoration member 371, the guide flow path 37e is formed on the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b. A penetrating portion 373e that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed so as to communicate on the side. Further, as shown in FIG. 6(b), on the rear surface side of the front base member 373, a plurality of rib-shaped extension walls 373f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b are provided. The extending wall 373f has different functions depending on the place where it is provided, and functions as a guide channel forming portion 373f1 that forms the guide channel 37e and a peripheral wall 373f2 that forms the periphery of the normal variable winning device 37. have.

Guidance channel formation part 373f1 forms guidance channel 37e so that a game ball which flowed into penetration part 373e may be guided back. In addition, a rib 373g for guiding a game ball backward is formed at the lower end of the guide channel forming portion 373f1. The lower end portion of the guide flow path forming portion 373f1 and the rib 373g formed at the lower end portion have an upper surface that slopes backward, and the game ball that has flowed into the through portion 373e is received by these upper surfaces and is moved backward. It is designed to guide you to The guided game balls flow into a discharge channel for discharging the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加

The surrounding wall 373f2 is formed in accordance with the shape of a penetrating portion penetrating back and forth formed in a portion of the game board body 80 where the normal variable winning device 37 is attached, and the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board body 80. At this time, the peripheral wall 373f2 is inserted into the through portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b located outside the surrounding wall 373f2 comes into contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rear base member 375 has a peripheral wall 375a that coincides with the peripheral wall 373f2 of the front base member 373 in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a pair of guides for guiding and supporting the movable member 37b that moves in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the movable member insertion portion 373c formed in the front base member 373 of the rear base member 375. is provided with a movable member holding portion 375b. The pair of movable member holding portions 375b are arranged with a predetermined interval (gap 375c) therebetween, and are capable of coming into contact with the lower surface of the movable member 37b and capable of guiding and supporting the movable member 37b. is provided so as to extend along the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 4, on the front side of the rear base member 375, a movable member unit 374 including the movable member 37b and an operating mechanism (driving mechanism) for operating the movable member 37b is attached. The movable member unit 374 includes a movable member 37b capable of sliding in the front-rear direction, a common solenoid 37c for operating the movable member 37b, and a slider 374a for transmitting the driving force from the common solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. and a crank 374b.

The movable member unit 374 has a closed state in which the movable member 37b protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 5(a) and an open state in which the movable member 37b is retracted rearward as shown in FIG. 5(b). It is convertible. In addition, the movable member 37b can appear above the electric prize opening 37d via a movable member holding portion 375b formed on the rear base member 375 and a movable member insertion portion 373c formed on the front base member 373. there is

FIG. 7(a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable member unit 374, and FIG. 7(b) is a front view of the movable member 37b. 8A is a top view of the movable member 37b, and FIG. 8B is a bottom view of the movable member 37b. As shown in FIG. 7A, the movable member 37b includes an upper step portion 37b1, a first middle step portion 37b2 provided at a position lower than the upper step portion 37b1, and a position lower than the first middle step portion 37b2. The provided second middle step portion 37b3 and the lower step portion 37b4 provided at a position lower than the second middle step portion 37b3 form a stepped shape aligned in the left-right direction. The upper part 37b1, the first middle part 37b2, the second middle part 37b3, and the lower part 37b4 are arranged in this order so that the upper part 37b1 is arranged on the leftmost side and the lower part 37b4 is arranged on the rightmost side. The ball is made to flow down from left to right.

The upper stage portion 37b1 has a front end portion that extends upward from the normal power winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and serves as a flow-down passage forming portion that forms the bottom surface of the flow-down passage 37f. The flow-down passage forming portion of the upper step portion 37b1 is one step lower than the portion other than the flow-down passage forming portion of the upper step portion 37b1. A lower wall projecting portion 37b5 extends forward from the right end portion of the portion of the upper stage portion 37b1 other than the flow passage forming portion. The lower wall projecting portion 37b5 has a sloped left side surface, and is provided so as to gradually narrow the width (the length in the front-rear direction) of the downflow path forming portion. The lower wall projecting portion 37b5 has a function of guiding forward the game ball flowing down to the right in order to make the game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f meander and suppress the power of the game. That is, it forms a contact portion that can be contacted by a game ball flowing down the downflow path 37f.

A front end portion of the first intermediate stage portion 37b2, which extends upward from the ordinary power winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in a closed state, serves as a downstream passage forming portion forming a bottom surface of the downstream passage 37f. The portion other than the portion (that is, the portion other than the flow-down passage forming portion) serves as the detour forming portion forming the bottom surface of the detour 37g. A boundary portion between the flow-down passage forming portion and the detour forming portion of the first intermediate stage portion 37b2 is arranged directly below the inlet 37g1 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

The first intermediate step portion 37b2 is inclined such that the rear end is positioned lower than the front end. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the game ball can easily roll from the front side to the rear side in the upstream portion of the detour 37g. A meandering left rib portion 37b6 is formed on the upper surface of the first intermediate step portion 37b2 to protrude upward and extend in the front-rear direction. As a result, the game ball rolling on the detour 37g is meandered to suppress the power of the ball.

When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the second middle stage portion 37b3 has a front end portion extending upward from the ordinary power winning opening 37d. is placed directly under the

When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the front end portion of the lower portion 37b4 extends upward from the normal power winning opening 37d so as to cover the bottom surface of the downflow passage 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the end point of the downflow passage 37f). A portion other than the front end portion (that is, a portion other than the flow-down passage forming portion) serves as a detour forming portion forming the bottom surface of the detour 37g. A boundary portion between the flow-down passage forming portion and the detour forming portion of the lower stage portion 37b4 is arranged directly below the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

The lower stepped portion 37b4 is inclined so that the rear end is positioned higher than the front end, and the rear end portion is flush with the rear end portion of the first intermediate stepped portion 37b2. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8(a), the game ball rolls easily from the rear side to the front side in the downstream portion of the detour 37g. The rear end portion of the lower step portion 37b4 may be provided at a position lower than the rear end portion of the first intermediate step portion 37b2. A meandering right rib portion 37b7 that protrudes upward and extends in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper surface of the lower step portion 37b4. As a result, the game ball rolling on the detour 37g is meandered to suppress the power of the ball.

Thus, the movable member 37b is provided with raised portions such as the lower wall projecting portion 37b5, the left projecting portion 37b6, and the right projecting portion 37b7. Further, the front decoration member 371 is provided with a raised portion such as an upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the front base member 373 is provided with a raised portion such as a rear wall protrusion 373d. . With such a raised portion, the game ball stays on the movable member 37b for a longer time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6(b), downwardly extending sliding portions 37b8 are formed at the left and right ends of the movable member 37b. The sliding portion 37b8 is formed to extend in the front-rear direction, and contacts the upper surfaces of a pair of holding portions 373h formed on the front base member 373, thereby moving the movable member 37b on the holding portions 373h. It becomes slidable.

As shown in FIGS. 7B and 8B, a connecting pin 37b9 protruding downward is provided in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b. Further, as shown in FIG. 7A, a crank (drive arm) 374b for transmitting the driving force from the ordinary solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is formed with a through portion 374b1 through which the connection pin 37b9 can be inserted. The movable member 37b and the crank 374b are connected by inserting the tip (lower end) of the connection pin 37b9 into the through portion 374b1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 7B and 8B, in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b, the front and rear sides of the connection pin 37b9 project downward and extend along the front-rear direction. A guide rib 37b10 is provided. The guide rib 37b10 is formed by a gap 373i (see FIG. 6B) formed along the front-rear direction between a pair of holding portions 373h of the front base member 373, or a pair of movable members of the rear base member 375. It can be inserted into a gap 375c (see FIG. 4) formed along the front-rear direction between the holding portions 375b. By inserting the guide ribs 37b10 of the movable member 37b into the gaps 373i and 375c from above, the linear movement (sliding movement) of the movable member 37b in the front-rear direction can be guided. That is, the guide ribs 37b10 of the movable member 37b are fitted into the gaps 373i of the front base member 373 and the gaps 375c of the rear base member 375, thereby restricting the lateral movement of the movable member 37b. can be limited to movement in the fore-and-aft direction.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), a crank 374b that transmits the driving force from the common solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is a substantially L-shaped member, and one end thereof is connected to a connecting pin 37b9 of the movable member 37b. A penetrating portion 374b1 that can be inserted is formed, and a convex portion 374b2 is formed at the other end. A slider 374a that transmits the driving force from the ordinary solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is formed with a concave portion 374a1 into which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted. , the slider 374a and the crank 374b are connected. A rotating shaft 374b3 extending in the vertical direction is formed at the bent portion of the crank 374b, and the crank 374b can rotate about the rotating shaft 374b3. The rotating shaft 374b3 is sandwiched between the rear base member 375 from above and below and is rotatably held.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the slider 374a includes a flat plate-like main body portion 374a2 perpendicular to the vertical direction, a left wall portion 374a3 connected to the left end of the main body portion 374a2 and perpendicular to the main body portion 374a2, and a main body portion 374a3. It is composed of a front wall portion 374a4 connected to the front end of 374a2 and perpendicular to the body portion 374a2, and a projecting piece 374a5 projecting forward from the front wall portion 374a4. A concave portion 374a1 into which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted is formed in the main body portion 374a2.

The left wall portion 374a3 of the slider 374a is engaged with the drive shaft 37c1 of the common solenoid 37c, and the drive shaft 37c1 of the slider 374a extends (in this embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the right). Then, it is pushed by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the right, and when the drive shaft 37c1 retracts (in this embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the left), it is pulled by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the left. do.

As shown in FIG. 6(b), the rear surface side of the front base member 373 is provided with a recessed portion 373j extending along the left-right direction. A protruding piece 374a5 of the slider 374a can be inserted into the recessed portion 373j. By inserting the protruding piece 374a5 into the recessed portion 373j from behind, the slider 374a is guided to move linearly (sliding) in the horizontal direction. be able to. Further, the front wall portion 374a4 of the slider 374a contacts the rear surface of the front base member 373 when the projecting piece 374a5 of the slider 374a is inserted into the recessed portion 373j of the front base member 373 from behind. As a result, the front and rear positions of the slider 374a with respect to the front base member 373 are set to predetermined front and rear positions.

When the movable member 37b is to be changed from the open state to the closed state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the common solenoid 37c is extended. When the drive shaft 37c1 extends, the slider 374a slides to the right, and the crank 374b rotates about the rotation shaft 374b3 counterclockwise when viewed from above, so that the connection pin 983a faces forward. , and the movable member 37b protrudes forward. As a result, the movable member 37b is closed (the state shown in FIG. 5(a)), and the winning of the game ball to the general electrical winning opening 37d is disabled.

On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is to be changed from the closed state to the open state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the common solenoid 37c is retracted. When the drive shaft 37c1 retracts, the slider 374a slides to the left, and the crank 374b rotates around the rotation shaft 374b3 in the clockwise direction when viewed from above, so that the connection pin 37b9 faces rearward. By moving, the movable member 37b retreats rearward. As a result, the movable member 37b becomes an open state (the state shown in FIG. 5(b)), and the winning of the game ball to the general electrical winning opening 37d becomes possible.

9 to 12 show rolling modes of game balls in the normal variable winning device 37. FIG. 9 to 12, illustration of some members is omitted for the sake of explanation. A game ball that has arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 (a game ball that has flowed into the starting point of the downflow path 37f) is first guided obliquely rearward by the upstream front wall projection 371d located upstream, and then upstream. is guided obliquely forward by the rear wall protrusion 373d positioned at , and flows into the front end portion of the upper stage portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b.

The game ball that has flowed into the upper stage portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b is guided obliquely rearward by the upstream front wall projection 371d located downstream, and then the rear wall projection 373d and the movable member 37b located downstream. is guided obliquely forward by the lower wall projecting portion 37b5, and flows into the front end portion of the first intermediate step portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b. That is, the game ball flows down the downflow path 37f while meandering back and forth. As a result, the game ball stays on the movable member 37b more than when the downflow path 37f does not have a lower wall protrusion 37b5, an upstream front wall protrusion 371d, a rear wall protrusion 373d, or the like, and flows straight down. it takes longer.

The game ball that has flowed into the first middle stage portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b collides with the projecting portion 371b and is guided rearward by the projecting portion 371b and the first middle stage portion 37b2 that is downwardly inclined to the rear. As shown in (a), it flows into the detour 37g from the entrance 37g1 of the detour 37g. As shown in FIG. 10, inside the rear base member 375, there are a first guide piece 375d for guiding the game ball rolling in the detour 37g from the first middle section 37b2 to the lower section 37b4, and a lower section 37b4. A second guide piece 375e is provided to guide the top from the rear side to the front side. As shown in FIG. 10, when the game ball rolls on the first middle section 37b2 and flows into the rear base member 375, it is guided to the right by the first guide piece 375d as shown in FIG. It flows into the portion 37b4.

As shown in FIG. 12, the game ball flowing into the lower portion 37b4 of the movable member 37b is guided forward by the second guide piece 375e and the lower portion 37b4 inclined forward downward, and is shown in FIG. 9(b). , it flows from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g to the end point (the front end portion of the lower stage portion 37b4) of the downflow passage 37f. Here, since the meandering left rib portion 37b6 is formed in the first middle step portion 37b2, the game ball rolls on the upstream portion of the detour 37g to the rear side while meandering left and right. In addition, since the meandering right rib portion 37b7 is formed in the lower portion 37b4, the game ball rolls forward on the downstream portion of the detour 37g while meandering left and right.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6(b), the front base member 373 has a partition wall 373k that separates the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the detour 37g. An intermediate projecting portion 373k1 is formed in a portion corresponding to the portion. Therefore, while the game ball is rolling on the upstream part of the detour 37g (that is, on the first middle part 37b2), it collides with the intermediate projection part 373k1 and bounces, and is pushed back to the entrance 37g1 side. be As a result, the game ball stays on the movable member 37b for a longer time than when the detour 37g does not have starting portions such as the left protrusion 37b6, the right protrusion 37b7, and the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and rolls linearly. become longer.

Thus, the downstream path 37f is provided with starting portions such as the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the rear wall protrusion 373d, while the detour 37g is provided with the left protrusion 37b6 and the rear wall protrusion 373d. Since the raised portions such as the right ridge portion 37b7 and the intermediate protrusion portion 373k1 are provided, the game ball stays on the movable member 37b for a longer time. In addition, by providing these starting portions, the game ball rolling on the movable member 37b can be rolled in a variety of ways, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. In addition, by providing these raised portions, when the movable member 37b is opened, it is possible to shift the flow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the movable member 37b into the general electrical winning opening 37d. It is possible to prevent clogging of balls in the winning opening 37d.

The game ball that has arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 flows down the downflow path 37f and first flows into the upper part 37b1 of the movable member 37b. When the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1 and the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball flows into the electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g. On the other hand, when the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1 and the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flows down the downflow path 37f toward the projecting portion 371b. And, when the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball collides with the protruding portion 371b, the game ball flows into the electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g. On the other hand, when the movable member 37b does not open before the game ball collides with the projecting portion 371b, the game ball collides with the projecting portion 371b and heads for the detour 37g.

Even if the movable member 37b is opened while the game ball is rolling on the detour 37g, the movable member 37b is not opened while the game ball is rolling on the detour 37g. Even if there is not, the game ball continues to roll on the detour 37g toward the exit 37g2. Then, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, and the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball flows into the general electrical winning opening 37d. On the other hand, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is in a closed state, the game ball does not flow into the general electric winning opening 37d, and the normal variable winning device 37 (game area 32), and becomes a game ball that fails to win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37.例文帳に追加

Here, the intermediate protrusion 373k1 (see FIG. 6(b)) formed on the partition wall 373k of the front base member 373 has a function of making the game ball meander and lengthening the residence time of the game ball staying on the movable member 37b. In addition, it also has a function of ensuring a sufficient retention time even when the movable member 37b operates (moves back and forth) while the game ball is rolling in the detour 37g. For example, when the movable member 37b is changed to the open state while the game ball is rolling in the downstream part of the detour 37g (that is, on the lower part 37b4), the game ball is in contact with the movable member 37b. Due to frictional resistance, contact with the right ridge portion 37b7, etc., it is pulled back to the rear side (upstream side) in the downstream part of the detour 37g, so the game ball is rolling in the downstream part of the detour 37g. The staying time of the game ball staying on the movable member 37b becomes longer than when the movable member 37b does not change the state during the game.

On the other hand, for example, when the movable member 37b is changed to the open state while the game ball is rolling on the upstream part of the detour 37g (that is, on the first middle part 37b2), the game ball is movable Due to frictional resistance with the member 37b, contact with the left protrusion 37b6, etc., the game ball is pulled backward (downstream) in the upstream part of the detour 37g, so that the game ball rolls the upstream part of the detour 37g. The staying time of the game ball staying on the movable member 37b becomes shorter than when the movable member 37b does not change the state while it is moving. On the other hand, since the normal variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment is provided with an intermediate protrusion 373k1 in the upstream portion of the detour 37g, the game ball moves backward (downstream) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g. When it is pulled in, it collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and bounces. That is, the game ball collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 while being drawn to the downstream side, and is once pushed back to the front side (upstream side) in the upstream part of the detour 37g, so that the game ball is upstream of the detour 37g. Even if the movable member 37b is changed to the open state while rolling on the part, it is possible to secure a sufficient residence time of the game ball on the movable member 37b.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a game board main body 80 in which a game area 32 in which game balls can flow down is formed on the front side, and a variable prize winning device (this embodiment) provided in the game area 32 In the case of , the gaming machine includes a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80, and a game area 32 can win a winning area (in the case of the present embodiment, the general electric winning opening 37d), a closed state that closes the winning area and an open state that opens the winning area. A member 37b), a flow path (downflow path 37f) in which the game ball can roll, a retention area (detour 37g) for retaining the game ball, and a game ball rolling (flowing down) in the flow path are retained. and a guide portion (protruding portion 371b) that guides to the area. The flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall portion by the opening/closing member in the closed state, and when the opening/closing member is in the open state, the flow path is formed when the opening/closing member is in the closed state. The game ball is configured to enter the winning area through the space, and the retention area is formed on the rear surface side of the mounting wall regardless of the state of the opening and closing member, and has a plurality of communication ports communicating with the flow path. , the game ball guided by the guiding part and flowing in from the flow path through one of the plurality of communication ports (inlet 37g1), and the one communication port of the plurality of communication ports is configured to be able to flow out to the channel through a different communication port (outlet 37g2).

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a game board main body 80 in which a game area 32 in which game balls can flow down is formed on the front side, and a variable prize winning device (this embodiment) provided in the game area 32 In the case of , the gaming machine includes a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device to the game board main body 80, and a game area A winning area (general electric winning opening 37d) in which the game ball flowing down the 32 can win a prize, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot or cannot win a prize in the winning area by sliding back and forth, and a game ball in the winning area. A slide member (movable member 37b) that can be converted to an open state in which a game ball can roll, a first flow path (downflow path 37f) and a second flow path (detour path 37g) in which a game ball can roll, and a first A guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) that guides a game ball rolling (flowing down) in the flow path to the second flow path is provided. The first flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall portion by the slide member when the slide member is in the closed state, and when the slide member is in the open state, the first flow path is formed in the closed state. In some cases, the game ball is configured to enter the winning area through the space in which the first flow path is formed, and the second flow path is formed by the slide member regardless of the state of the slide member. It is formed on the rear surface side, and both ends are communication ports communicating with the first flow channel, and are guided by the guide portion and flowed from the first flow channel through one of the communication ports (inlet 37g1) of the both ends. The game ball is configured to be able to flow out to the first flow path through the other communication port (outlet 37g2) of the two ends.

That is, the normal variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a detour 37g (retention area, second flow path) is added to the downflow path 37f (flow path, first flow path). By adding the detour 37g in this way, the residence time of the game ball staying on the upper surface of the movable member 37b (opening/closing member, slide member) becomes longer than when there is no detour 37g. Therefore, it becomes easier for the game balls to enter the winning opening (in the case of the present embodiment, the general electric winning opening 37d), and the reduction of the game balls during the predetermined game state (in the case of the present embodiment, the time saving state) can be suppressed. is possible, the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the normal variable prize winning device 37 having a game ball retention function is arranged in the right game area (the area on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32), the player can easily catch the game balls in the right game area. You can enjoy the rolling mode. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the front decoration member 371 is made of a material that allows light to pass through, and the rolling state of the game balls in the normal variable prize winning device 37 is sufficiently visible. The rolling mode of the game ball can be enjoyed more.

The variable winning device provided in the game area 32 is not limited to the normal variable winning device 37, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special variable winning device 38 may be used. Specifically, the variable winning device is, for example, a detour 37g (retention area, second channel) added to the downflow channel 38f (channel, first channel) of the special variable winning device 38. may Further, the opening/closing member that can be converted between the closed state that closes the winning opening and the open state that opens the winning opening is not limited to the sliding member, and can be changed as appropriate. In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 13(a), a sliding member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by sliding back and forth is provided as an opening/closing member. For example, as shown in FIG. 13(b), it may be a rotating member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by rotating around a rotating axis Z.

Moreover, the retention area for retaining the game ball is not limited to the detour 37g (second flow path), and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the retention area is, for example, a space in which the upstream portion and the downstream portion are not separated, that is, a space obtained by removing the partition wall 373k separating the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the detour 37g from the detour 37g. , a space obtained by removing a portion of the partition 373k other than the front end portion (the portion separating the inlet 37g1 and the outlet 37g2) from the detour 37g.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rate at which the game ball flows from the first flow path (downflow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through one of the communication ports (inlet 37g1) is It is higher than the rate at which the game ball flows from the first flow path (downflow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through the mouth (outlet 37g2), and the slide member (movable member 37b) has one communication It is possible to provide a height difference (in the case of this embodiment, a step or an inclination) such that the port is arranged at a higher position than the other communication port. By configuring in this way, since the game ball can smoothly roll in the first flow path (downflow path 37f) and the second flow path (detour path 37g), the first flow path and the second flow path It is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring.

In addition, in the present embodiment, on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b), there is provided a ball for suppressing the power of a game ball rolling in the first flow path (downstream path 37f) or the second flow path (detour path 37g). (In the case of this embodiment, the lower wall projecting portion 37b5, the left projecting portion 37b6, and the right projecting portion 37b7) can be provided. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to further extend the residence time in which the game ball stays on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b), a predetermined game state (in the case of this embodiment, a time saving state ), it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of game balls in the game, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the pitch suppressing portion, the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, the rear wall protrusion 373d, and the like are provided in the downstream passage 37f, and the detour 37g is provided. Although the raised portions (convex portions) such as the left rib portion 37b6, the right rib portion 37b7, and the intermediate projection portion 373k1 are provided in the upper portion, the pitch suppressing portion is not limited to these and can be changed as appropriate. Moreover, you may provide a lower part (recessed part) in 37 f of flow-down paths, and 37 g of detours as a pitch suppression part. Specifically, for example, a meandering groove may be formed on the upper surface of the movable member 37b as a lower part, and the game ball may roll while meandering along the groove. Further, as the ball force suppressing portion, undulations (both undulations and undulations) may be provided in the downflow path 37f and the detour 37g so that the game ball rolls while meandering due to the undulations. Also, the pitch suppressing portion is not limited to the raised portion (convex portion) or the lower portion (concave portion), and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the game area 32, in addition to a retention device (normal variable winning device 37) having a game ball retention function, members that suppress the power of the ball (obstacle nail, windmill, downflow path 615, guide section 616 etc.), that is, a retention member having a game ball retention function is provided. Therefore, since the game ball can be made to stay in the right game area by the staying device and the staying member, it is possible to enjoy the rolling mode of the game ball in the right game area. In addition, there are methods to retain game balls by providing unevenness on the surface, methods to retain game balls by using materials with a high coefficient of friction, and methods to perform certain movements with the driving force of a drive source (solenoid, etc.). A game ball retention function may be imparted to a predetermined member or device by a method of retaining balls, a method of retaining game balls by providing a sorting device, or the like.

In addition, since the normal variable winning device 37 can retain the game ball in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 10 by the starting portion and the detour 37g, a retaining member (a retaining device other than the normal variable winning device 37) may be used. ) is preferably configured so that game balls can be retained in directions other than the front-rear direction (horizontal direction and vertical direction of the gaming machine 10). As a result, the staying member (and/or a staying device other than the normal variable winning device 37) and the normal variable winning device 37 allow the game machine to stay three-dimensionally, so that the staying time can be earned. At the same time, the interest in the rolling of the game ball is improved.

Also, an out-port 30c, a general prize-winning port 35, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "out-port 30c, etc.") may be provided in the middle of the detour 37g. As a result, the player's attention can be attracted to whether or not the game ball that has failed to enter the normal variable winning device 37 comes out of the normal variable winning device 37, and the amusement is improved and the balls are delivered. It is possible to adjust the ratio so that it does not become too large, and to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the detour 37g.

Further, when the out-port 30c or the like is provided in the middle of the detour 37g, game balls may flow into the out-port 30c or the like when the movable member 37b operates. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a through hole 37b11 is provided in a portion of the movable member 37b that forms the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state (or may be in the closed state), the vertical positions of the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c are aligned (the through hole 37b11 is positioned directly above the out port 30c). ), the game ball on the movable member 37b can flow into the out port 30c, and when the movable member 37b is in a closed state (or an open state), the vertical movement of the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c The position of the direction does not match (the through hole 37b11 is displaced from directly above the out port 30c), and it is also possible to configure such that the game ball on the movable member 37b cannot or is difficult to flow into the out port 30c. be.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generation and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from the DC32V voltage, and the like. 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure. and a control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100 so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 is capable of storing and holding information related to the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It constitutes a game information storage holding means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. processing takes place. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B nonvolatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control, and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not have And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern (various types) in the special figure variation display game. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining reach and execution time of variation display game in variation display without reach, hit random numbers for determining hit of normal figure variation display game, etc. and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit. there is

In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result of the special figure variation display game (big hit, small hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table out of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variable winning device 37. 37a, a starting port 3 switch 97a in the second start winning port 97, a winning port switch 35a, a plurality of (1 to x, two in this embodiment) large winning port switches provided in the special variable winning device 38 38a is connected to the gate switch 34a in the normal start gate 34. A negative logic signal such as 11V high level and 7V low level supplied from these switches is input, and a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is input. is provided with an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that converts the The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a and the gate switch 34a are the second inputs. Input to port 123 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 . Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 or the like, or the glass frame open detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 or the like. A detection signal from the switch 63 and a detection signal from a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Furthermore, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122 , 123 , 124 of the input section 120 . The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data bus 140 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that it is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch not via the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to output the opening/closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the special variable winning device 38 and the general electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37. An output port 134 is provided. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal board 71 . The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information on the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives opening/closing data signals of the big winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. , a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the lead-in side digit line, and a fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal board 71 an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning port 97 The switch 97a, the winning slot switch 35a, the big winning slot switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are provided with coils for detecting magnetic fields. type magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 .
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) similar to the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that can be restored even if power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of holding data and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 forming a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the performance, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decorative lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, etc. The function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps and motors. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment. The game state includes a normal game state ST1, a first specific game state ST2, a second specific game state ST3, and a third specific game state ST4. In addition, as the special game state, there is a first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability that the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the production mode that determines the production mode of the game controlled by the production control device 300, the main in the game state A main starting area which is a starting area to be aimed at, a main variation special figure which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and a shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the first starting prize-winning port 36 by hitting to the left, and to aim to win a prize in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 or the second starting prize-winning port 97 by hitting to the right. It is possible. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. In addition, in each game state, it is designed on the assumption that either one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be played mainly, and the player will play the game according to this design. It is structured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one of the special figure fluctuation display games which is determined to be the main one in terms of design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

The normal game state ST1 is a state in which the special figure probability is low probability, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. It is in a state where there is no time to shorten the variation time of the figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first start winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this first starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. As will be described later, in this normal game state ST1, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state ST1. .

The first specific game state ST2 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electric support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 1 variation display game, but the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this first specific game state ST2, the variable time of the special figure 1 variation display game becomes shorter than in the case of the normal game state ST1. It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game. The second specific game state ST3 is the same as the first specific game state ST2 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

The third specific game state ST4 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, there is no general electric support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display. It is a state where there is a reduction in time to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a small hit RUSH. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the second start winning opening 97, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this second starting winning opening 97. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

In this third specific game state ST4, the variable time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened compared to the case of the normal game state ST1, and the player hits to the right to aim at the second start winning opening 97, thereby achieving a special figure. Playing the 2-variation display game is more advantageous for the player. The special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small win than the special figure 1 variation display game, and the probability of winning a small win is higher than that of a big win. It occurs frequently and the number of balls possessed by the player increases. Since small hits occur with high frequency in this way, the production mode is a mode called a small hit RUSH.

Among these four game states, the normal game state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1 because there is a general electric support, and the first specific game state ST2 is a high probability state, so the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3. This state is more advantageous for the player than the game state ST3. Furthermore, the third specific game state ST4 is a state in which the number of balls held by the player increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, so the player is more likely than the normal game state ST1, the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3. It is a favorable situation for

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the special game state based on the derivation of the special result and completing the prescribed number of games. Basically, when the special result that triggered the start of the special game state is a probability variable jackpot with a high probability state after the end of the special game state, the transition is made to the first specific game state ST2, and the special In the case of a normal jackpot with a low probability state after the end of the game state, the game shifts to the second specific game state ST3.

In the second specific game state ST3, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) without deriving the first special result from the end of the special game state, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, in the first specific game state ST2, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) without deriving the first special result from the end of the special game state, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST4. . Since the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 are set to the same chance mode in the performance mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp which game state the player is staying in if it cannot be determined by the special result. be.

The player stays in the third specific game state ST4 until the next first special result is derived. By providing this third specific game state ST4, it is possible to provide a period for increasing the number of balls possessed by the player by the small win before the special game state based on the big win is started, and in the third specific game state ST4. The increase in the number of balls held in the second game and the subsequent increase in the number of balls held in the special game state can provide the player with many benefits. In particular, the situation in which it is possible to shift to the third specific game state ST4 is a so-called fit in which the next big hit is not derived even if the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times after the special game state based on the probability variable big win is completed. It is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction that a big win is not derived by making it possible to give a profit to the player in such a situation. In addition, it is possible to provide the player with an amusement which is not found in conventional game machines, in which players expect to be stuck.

The normal variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a game ball retention function that retains game balls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b. is retained, and when the movable member 37b is in an open state, the game ball is swallowed (the game ball retained on the movable member 37b is dropped to enter the general electrical winning opening 37d). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to enter the normal variable winning device 37, that is, the number of game balls that arrive at the normal variable winning device 37 but cannot enter the normal electrical winning port 37d.

In addition, since the second starting prize winning port 97 is arranged below the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball that fails to win the normal variable winning device 37 can win the second starting winning port 97. . In the case of this embodiment, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 reduces the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37, so the main starting area is the normal electric winning port 37d (the game state (second 1 specific game state ST2, 2nd specific game state ST3), it is possible to make it difficult to win the second start winning port 97.

The main starting area of the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 is the general electrical winning opening 37d, and the main starting area of the third specific game state ST4 is the second starting winning opening 97, so the first specific In the case of the game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, that is, when the high/low probability support state exists, it is impossible (difficult) to win the second start prize winning port 97, and in the case of the third specific game state ST4, that is, It is preferable that the winning to the second start winning opening 97 is possible only when the high probability support non-state. When a game ball enters the second start winning hole 97 in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 and a small hit occurs, there is a possibility that the ball output rate deviates greatly from the designed value.

The winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 can be calculated using the following formula (1).
Prize-winning rate [%] = Number of game balls that have won a prize in the general electric prize-winning port 37d/Number of game balls that have arrived at the normal variable prize-winning device 37 (game balls that have flowed into the starting point of the downflow path 37f) x 100 (1) )
In this embodiment, the second starting winning opening 97 is arranged at the lower right of the game area 32 , and the normal variable winning opening 37 is arranged above the second starting winning opening 97 . Since the normal variable winning device 37 has a game ball retention function, the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37 can be reduced. Furthermore, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to the start of the operation, and the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 (the game ball rolls from the start point to the end point of the flow path 37f) By adjusting the time taken to win), etc., the failure of winning to the normal variable winning device 37 in the winning state of the normal pattern is almost 0, that is, the failure to the normal variable winning device 37 in the winning state of the normal pattern It is possible to make the winning rate almost 100%. By setting the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal winning state to almost 100%, it is possible to make it difficult to win the second start winning port 97 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to achieve the desired performance (ball output rate).

On the other hand, when the high-probability support non-state (third specific game state ST4), since the normal variable winning device 37 does not open, it is possible to win the game ball to the second start winning opening 97, realizing a small hit RUSH. can do. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to configure the second start winning port 97 to win only when the high probability no support state (the third specific game state ST4), and achieve the desired performance. .

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 22(a), the normal pattern fluctuation time (that is, normal pattern fluctuation time) is 200 ms, and the normal pattern stop time (that is, normal map display time) is 100 ms. Yes, the normal electric operation time (that is, the sum of the total electric open time and the total wait time per normal electric hit state) is 5800 ms, and the ending time (that is, the electric residual ball If the sum of the processing time and the normal drawing ending time) is 700 ms, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is at least 1000 ms (=700 ms+200 ms+100 ms). In this case, the length of the downflow path 37f and the detour 37g, the number and shape of the undulations provided in the downflow path 37f and the detour 37g are appropriately designed, and the retention time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is 1000 msec. , it becomes possible to make the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 almost 100% in the normal winning state.

Of course, as in the example shown here, according to the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation, the winning rate of the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal winning state is almost 100%. , the retention time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 may be set, or conversely, according to the retention time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37 in the winning state of the normal figure The time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation may be set so that the winning rate of 1 is almost 100%.

That is, in this embodiment, one of the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 and the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is changed to a time corresponding to the other (substantially the same as the other). time, time longer than the other, etc.), the winning rate of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 can be increased. In addition, by increasing the retention time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 by increasing the portion that suppresses the power of the ball such as the rising part and the lower part, Until the start), more game balls can be retained on the movable member 37b, and when the movable member 37b is in an open state, the game balls retained on the movable member 37b are allowed to win. is possible, the winning rate of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 is improved. Conversely, by extending the normal pattern fluctuation time and the like from the time shown in FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal variable winning device 37 has a game ball retention function, and the second starting winning port 97 and the special variable winning device 38 are arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, the time from when the game ball is shot until it arrives at the second start winning port 97 or the special variable winning device 38 is made longer than when the normal variable winning device 37 does not have the game ball staying function. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the use of an unrecommended hitting method, and increase the degree of freedom in the opening pattern of the big winning opening (opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing member 990).

Left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal game state ST1, but when the right-handed hitting is made in the normal game state ST1 and the game ball enters the second start winning hole 97, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed. In the normal game state ST1, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is set longer than that in the second specific game state, but by performing aiming shots (stop shots, timing shots, etc.), a large winning opening It is possible to aim for the prize. When the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state ST1. At the same time as the start of the small winning game state (start of opening of the big winning opening), the game ball is made to arrive at the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the small winning game state by aiming at hitting the game ball, etc. It is possible to win a prize in the prize winning opening. Therefore, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game during the normal game state ST1, there is a possibility that an unrecommended hitting method (right hitting) is performed.

On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, since the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 has a game ball staying function, the game ball reaches the special variable winning device 38. It takes time to do so. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state, even if aiming such as starting to hit the game ball with the start of the small winning game state (start of opening the big winning opening), the game ball cannot reach the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the small winning game state. Therefore, it is useless to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation display game during the normal game state ST1, so it is not recommended to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation display game during the normal game state ST1, that is, the normal game state ST1. You can avoid being hit. In this way, according to the present embodiment, fraudulent winning by strategy, that is, generating a small hit by hitting to the right in the normal game state ST1, aiming and winning a small winning (a large winning opening during the small winning period) winning) can be prevented.

In addition, if the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have a game ball retention function, it prevents fraudulent winning by strategy (avoids unrecommended hitting). ), it is necessary to limit the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state, such as performing short opening only once. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, since the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 has a game ball staying function, the game balls arrive at the special variable winning device 38. It takes time to do so. Therefore, even if the big winning opening is opened multiple times during the small winning game state, it is possible to prevent fraudulent winning due to capture, so that the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state can be increased. can.

Here, for example, the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have a game ball retention function, and the game balls arrive at the special variable winning device 38 after being shot. It takes about 2 seconds to In such a case, if the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. Even if the game ball is aimed at the start of hitting the game ball at the start of the game state, since the small winning game state is finished by the time the game ball reaches the special variable prize winning device 38, the game ball enters the big prize winning opening. I can't win.

On the other hand, in such a case, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. .5 second open state→1.0 second closed state→0.5 second open state”, by performing aiming such as starting to hit the game ball at the start of the small winning game state, the small winning game state Since the game ball can reach the special variable prize winning device 38 by the end of , the game ball can win the big prize opening. Therefore, in such a case, if an opening pattern of opening the big winning opening a plurality of times or the like is adopted as the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state, it is impossible to prevent fraudulent winning by strategy. On the other hand, adopting an opening pattern of opening the big winning hole a plurality of times as the opening pattern of the big winning hole in the small winning game state, that is, increasing the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning hole in the small winning game state. If it is possible, it is possible to improve the small winning performance (increase the number of balls output in the small winning game state), but it cannot be achieved by cheating.

In order to prevent fraudulent winning due to capture and improve small winning performance, a retention device (this embodiment's In that case, a normal variable prize winning device 37) or the like is provided. If the staying device delays the game ball for 2 seconds (a delay time of 2 seconds is provided), it takes about 4 seconds for the game ball to reach the special variable winning device 38 after being shot.

As a result, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. → 1.0 second closed state → 0.5 second open state", it takes 3.5 seconds (= 0.5 seconds + 1.0 seconds + 0.5 seconds + 1.0 seconds to complete the operation of the opening/closing member 990). seconds + 0.5 seconds), while it takes about 4 seconds from when the game ball is shot until it reaches the special variable winning device 38 . That is, in this embodiment, the time from the start of the operation of the opening and closing member 990 to the end of the operation in the small winning game state is longer than the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38. In addition, it can be configured to determine the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 according to the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing member 990 (opening pattern of the big winning opening) in the small winning game state.

Than the time from the start of the operation of the opening and closing member 990 in the small hit game state to the end of the operation (3.5 seconds in this example), the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 (this For example, by lengthening the period of about 4 seconds), even if you aim to hit the game ball with the start of the small winning game state, the small winning game will be played by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38. The state is terminated. Therefore, even if an opening pattern of opening the big winning opening a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state, it is possible to prevent fraudulent winning by strategy.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, by providing a retention device or the like that gives a delay time to the time from when the game ball is launched until it arrives at the special variable winning device 38, it is possible to prevent fraudulent winning due to capture. , It is possible to improve the small hit performance. Further, the longer the delay time, the longer the total time of the small-hit game state, so that the small-hit performance can be enhanced. Also, the longer the delay time, the more time it takes to reach the special variable prize winning device 38, which makes it more difficult to win fraudulently. Moreover, providing such a staying device or the like is effective not only for aiming during the general electric support but also for aiming during the small hit RUSH. In addition, the longer the delay time, the more difficult it is to aim and hit, so the player has to keep hitting, and stable data can be obtained even in the operation of the hole.

In addition, in the case of this embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, hit right and enter the second start winning port 97 to generate a small hit. When the figure hits, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 can reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37. It is possible to make it difficult for the special variable winning device 38 to win a prize. That is, according to the present embodiment, it takes time for the game balls to reach the special variable winning device 38 due to the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37, so fraudulent winning by strategy can be prevented. Furthermore, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 can reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37 (making it difficult for the special variable winning device 38 to win), so fraudulent winning by strategy can minimize the damage caused by

In addition, by increasing the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game state, it is possible not only to realize the improvement of the small winning performance (increase in ball output in the small winning game state), but also to open the big winning opening 38d. Since it is also possible to increase the number of times, the player can enjoy whether or not the game ball will flow into the big winning opening 38d, thereby improving the interest of the game. Incidentally, the time from when the game ball is shot until it reaches the special variable winning device 38 is about 2 seconds when there is no retention device, and about 4 seconds when there is a retention device. The arrival time is just an average value of actual measurements, and of course there is an error in the actual arrival time.

In addition, the alert (error notification) performed when the player hits right in the normal game state may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the second start winning opening 97 is satisfied. , It may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the normal pattern start gate 34 is satisfied, or the number of game balls that have entered the second start winning port 97 and the normal pattern start gate 34 have passed It may be performed when the condition that the sum with the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as a loss of interest and a loss of desire to play due to the fact that an erroneous right shot is immediately called to the player's attention. In addition, in the normal game state, the counter for counting the game balls that have won the second start winning port 97 and the counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the normal figure start gate 34 are configured to be cleared at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, it may be configured to be updated by -1 each time the first start prize winning port 36 is won.

FIG. 23 shows the probability of a big win and a small win, the distribution probability of a big win type when winning a big win, and the distribution probability of a small win type when winning a small win. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small win is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning device 38 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a big hit (first special result), is common to special figures 1 and 2, and the probability in the normal game state which is a low probability state and the specific game state which is a high probability state is shown in the figure. The probability is as shown in 23(a). The gaming machine of this embodiment is configured to enter a high-probability state after the special game state (first special game state) based on the probability-variable jackpot ends. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

A small hit probability, which is a probability of a small win (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. 23(b). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Also, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the game state or the big hit probability. In the lottery for the big win and the small win, the big win and the small win are not won in duplicate.

In addition, FIG. 23(c) shows the types of jackpots that can be selected for special figures 1 and 2, and the allocation probability of each jackpot type, and FIG. Possible types of small hits, opening time, number of times of opening and allocation probability of each type of small hits are shown. In addition, the small hit may not be provided in the special figure 1 and may be set only in the special figure 2.

24 and 25 show the variation patterns of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 24(a) shows a variation pattern when the result is a loss in the normal game state (low probability state). In the normal game state, the special figure 1 variation display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variation display game is designed to be the irregular variation. In order for the player to proceed with the game according to this design, for the special figure 2, even if any variation pattern is selected, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal game state, the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, but by setting the fluctuation time for a long time in the case of a losing result or a small hit described later, it is special in the normal game state. The execution of the FIG. 2 variation display game is made to be inefficient in terms of time, and in the normal game state, the player is allowed to proceed with the special figure 1 variation display game mainly.

FIG. 24(b) shows a variation pattern when the result is lost in the specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second specific game state ST3, third specific game state ST4). In this case, as for the variation pattern without reach in the special figure 1 variation display game, only the variation pattern with a shorter variation time than in the normal game state is selected. In addition, only the variable pan without reach can be selected for the special figure 2 variable display game. In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the special figure 1 variation display game becomes the main variation, and in the third specific game state ST4, the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the main variation. In addition, in the specific game state, it becomes a time saving state in which the fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal game state.

FIG. 25(a) shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the normal game state. For special figure 2, it is possible to select only the variation pattern that does not generate a reach state. In the normal game state, the variation time when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a big hit is a variation time longer than the selectable variation time when the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a big hit.

FIG. 25(b) shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second specific game state ST3, third specific game state ST4). For the special figure 1 variation display game, a variation pattern of variation time equivalent to that in the normal game state is selected. Also, for the special figure 2 variation display game, a variation pattern of variation time equivalent to the SP3 reach of the special figure 1 variation display game is set.

FIG. 25(c) shows a variation pattern when the result is a small hit in the normal game state. For special figure 2, the reach state is not generated, and a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. FIG. 25(d) shows a variation pattern when the result is a small hit in the specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second specific game state ST3, third specific game state ST4). Variation patterns with very short variation times, none of which cause a reach condition, are selected.

In FIG. 26, a special variable winning device in a special game state (first special game state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special game state (second special game state) based on a small hit (second special result) showed the opening and closing pattern of In the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game, when the jackpot type is 10R probability variable jackpot, the special variation winning device 38 is opened according to the big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1. - 特許庁In the big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, the opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). After that, rounds in which an interval period of 2000 ms and an open period of 29000 ms are set are repeated for 10 rounds, and the special game state ends after an ending period of 11000 ms. In addition, when the type of jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is 4R probability variable jackpot or 4R normal jackpot, the special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the big winning opening opening/closing pattern 2.例文帳に追加This opening/closing pattern differs from the 10R big hit opening/closing pattern only in the number of rounds.

The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each open/close pattern is the sum of the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, of which the first half 1400 ms is the remaining ball processing time and the latter half 600 ms is the interval time. The ending period of the big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1 is 11000 ms, of which the first half 1400 ms is the remaining ball processing time, and the latter half 9600 ms is the ending time.

The open/close pattern of the small hit has a fanfare period, an open period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure, and the special variable winning device 38 follows this. is released. In addition, in both the opening and closing patterns of the big win and the small win, when a specified number of prizes are won in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that time. The opening time of the small win is shorter than the opening time of the big win, and the number of winnings to the special variable winning device 38 in the special game state is reduced. Therefore, the small win has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the big win. That is, the special results include a first special result (jackpot) capable of generating a first special game state and a second special game state having a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. A possible second special result (minor win) is included.

The open/close pattern of the small win differs in the length of the fanfare period and the ending period depending on whether it is in the third specific game state or not, and is longer in the case of the third specific game state. In the third specific game state, in order to perform effects such as notification of a small hit and notification of the number of prize balls due to winning, the time for these is ensured. In addition, since small wins occur frequently in the third specific game state, the fanfare period and the ending period are lengthened to lengthen the time required for digestion of the special game state, thereby preventing the number of prize balls per unit time from becoming too large. I have to. Also, the opening time of the special variable winning device is the same regardless of whether it is in the third specific game state. Here, in each small win opening/closing pattern, only one opening is performed, but it is also possible to perform opening a plurality of times. In this case, the interval time for temporarily closing the special variable winning device 38 is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the specific game state.

Although both the length of the fanfare period and the length of the ending period are made different depending on whether or not the game is in the third specific game state, only one of them may be made different. Also, regarding the opening/closing pattern of the jackpot, one or both of the length of the fanfare period and the ending period may be varied depending on whether or not the player is in the third specific game state.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game. In addition, when not distinguishing the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is simply referred to as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. In addition, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as hits (special result). Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the 2nd special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply called a special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from a shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills placed in various places in the game area 32, and enters the general winning opening 35 and the first starting winning opening. 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning port 97, the special variable winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning opening 37, the second starting winning opening 97, and the special variable winning opening 38, the number corresponding to the type of the winning winning opening Prize balls are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from a payout unit controlled by a payout control device 200 (see FIG. 19).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the first start winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the general prize winning port 35 arranged on the left side of the, and by launching the game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable prize winning device 37, the special It is possible to aim at winning the variable prize winning device 38, the second start prize winning port 97, and the general prize winning port 35 arranged above the second start prize winning port 97.

The winning ball to the first start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game by the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a provided inside, A predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is stored as one start memory. When the game ball wins the first start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 in a state where the special figure 1 variable display game can be started and the first start memory number is 0, the start right is generated. Along with the first start memory is stored, the number of first start memory is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variation display game is immediately started based on the first start memory, and at this time, the first start memory The number is decremented by one. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variation display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variation display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variation display game has not ended, or when it is in a special game state. When a game ball wins in the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, if the first starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first starting memory number is increased by 1 and the first starting memory becomes one. will be remembered. Then, in a state where the first start memory number is 1 or more, when the special figure 1 variation display game can be started (end of the previous special figure 1 variation display game or end of the special game state), the first The starting memory number is decremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variation display game is started based on the stored first starting memory.

The winning ball to the second starting winning hole 97 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting hole 3 switch 97a provided inside. When there is a winning to the second start winning opening 97 in a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. In addition, when the special figure 2 variation display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variation display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variation display game has not ended, or when it is in a special game state Also, even if a game ball wins in the second starting winning port 97, the second starting memory does not occur. In addition, when there is a prize to the second start winning port 97 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the second start memory is generated once for the convenience of processing, but the second start memory is Since it will be consumed immediately, the second starting memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game does not occur.

In addition, when the start winning ball is detected, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot pattern random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, and the extracted random number values are stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 19). To the special figure storage area (part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 4 times for the first start memory). Then, the number of memories of this special figure start memory is displayed on the storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 reservation display device) for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50, and also in the display device 41 of the center case 40 It is displayed as a decoration special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and based on the winning to the second start winning opening 97, the special A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the FIG. 2 display device 52 (second variable display device). The special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time. When the second special result (minor hit) is obtained, the one special figure variation display game is terminated as a result other than the special result (losing result).

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure based on the winning of the game ball to the general electric winning opening 37d (first starting winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) It constitutes first execution control means for controlling the execution of the first variable display game (first special figure variable display game). In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) a second execution control means for controlling the execution of

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes a special result form (jackpot result form) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and it becomes a first special game state (so-called big win state). In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponds to the second special result special result mode (small hit result mode) As a result, it becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display device 51 can display the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 1st variation Form a display means. Also, the special figure 2 display device 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 .

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the end of the jackpot game state (first special game state), a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

Also, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41 displays a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) variably. A display game is to be run. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. Yes, and they are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variation display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. - 特許庁

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small hit, but in the normal game state with a low probability, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is the variation time. A very long (approximately 10 minutes) length variation is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, so that the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game by hitting to the left and aiming at the first start winning opening 36. - 特許庁The long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

From the above, the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning opening 37), and the result of the game is a special result. In the gaming machine 10 that generates a special game state advantageous to the player when it becomes, a game control means (game control device 100) for comprehensively controlling the game, and a special variable winning device that is opened in the special game state. (special variable winning device 38), and the game control means includes a fanfare period, which is a period from the start of the special game state to the start of opening the special variable winning device, and the last special variable winning device in the special game state. It is possible to set an ending period, which is the period from the end of the opening to the end of the special game state, and even if the special game state is based on the same special result, when the special result is derived The length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period can be varied according to the game state. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the first start winning port 36 forming the starting winning port, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning port 97 forming the starting winning port, the first starting winning port 36 or the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 A first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) for executing the first variable display game based on the winning of the first variable display game, and a second variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning port 97. A second variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) and a specification capable of generating a specific game state (third specific game state) in which the execution time of the second variation display game is set to be shorter than the normal state. A game state generation means (game control device 100), wherein the game control means determines the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period in the special game state based on the same special result. This means that the time when the game state when the special result is derived is the specific game state is longer than when the actual game state is not the specific game state. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. For example, in the specific game state, it is possible to secure the time to execute the effect, and in the case of not in the specific game state, the game can be progressed quickly.

In addition, the special results include a first special result whose derived probability can be changed according to the game state, and a second special result whose derived probability is constant regardless of the game state, The probability of deriving the second special result is higher than the probability of deriving the first special result. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, by making the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period different for the second special result that does not change the probability, the derived probability does not change, but the execution mode can be changed.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIG. 27, first, the processing for inhibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs, is stored. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order, and the first 00h being set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for normal startup. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the standby time starts, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. detectable. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. I have to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such a troublesome operation, it will be detected by performing an operation immediately after turning on the power, and the initialization operation performed when turning on the power It is possible to prevent a situation in which the

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read through the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) is set (step X8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step X9).

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (Step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (Step X9). Also, if the power failure monitor signal has been turned on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits for the power to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and the timer value is 0. is determined (step X12). If the timer value is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). If the timer value is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X13). ), output OFF data to all output ports (set to no output state) (step X14).

Next, the serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X15), read first However, it is judged from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

If the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17). If so (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19). match the checksum (step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 in FIG. 28, and the process for the normal recovery from the power failure is performed.

Also, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X25 in FIG. 28 to perform initialization. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. form.

At step X21 in FIG. 28, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The areas to be initialized here are the blackout inspection area, the checksum area, and the area related to error monitoring. The busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indeterminate state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X24), step Proceed to X30. In the case of this embodiment, in step X24, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 reservation number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command, etc. are transmitted. As for the screen designation command, when the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both in the normal processing described later, that is, when the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not being executed. Send the command for the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps X16, X17, X18, and X20 to step X25, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step X25), and all areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are cleared. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X26), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X27). Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step X28). The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X29), and the process proceeds to step X30. In the case of this embodiment, in step X29, the model designation command, the special figure 1 pending number command, the probability information command, the RAM initialization command (display the customer waiting demo screen, and light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) command for notifying RAM initialization). Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with the effect number information command and general electric support, is also transmitted.

At step X30, a process of activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC start-up process of step X30, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X31). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. A bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the extracted random number bit arrangement (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set.

After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted, and the corresponding initial value random number (in the case of this embodiment, the random number that determines the winning pattern of the special figure (Big win symbol random number, small win symbol random number)) is saved in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) (step X32), and then interrupt is permitted (step X33). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X34) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to destroy the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, the jackpot pattern random numbers, and the small hit pattern random numbers are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is faster than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) with the same period. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number and the small hit pattern random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number and the small hit pattern random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step X34, the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus is set (step X35), and power failure is performed. It is determined whether or not the monitor signal is on (step X36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X36; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step X34). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step X33) before the initial value random number update process (step X34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting due to the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number update process in step X34 may be performed in the main process as well as in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. In addition, if the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing, and it is only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step X36; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step X35 (step X37). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (Step X37; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (Step X36). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step X37; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing to temporarily prohibit interrupts (step X38) is performed. A process (step X39) of outputting OFF data to the output port is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X40), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X41). Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step X42) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing (step X43) for saving the calculated checksum, processing for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X44 ), and then wait until the gaming machine is turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when re-entering.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the operation of the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation section (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation section. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 29 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register saving process to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). At step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step X103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed.

Then, output processing (step X104) for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed based on output data set in various processes. When a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step X105), random number update processing 1 (step X106), and random number update processing 2 (step X107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, setting the prize ball, Winning port switch/state monitoring processing (step X108) for monitoring errors such as opening of the front frame and glass frame, and illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, a starting port switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring the winning of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a and the starting port 3 switch 97a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted based on the winning of game balls into the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, and the second starting winning opening 97. Then, the special figure 1 game processing (step X110) for performing the processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 2 game processing (step X111) for performing processing regarding the special figure 2 variation display game, and the processing related to the normal figure variation display game Execute normal game processing (step X112).

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X113) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display the desired content (step X113), the magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring processing (step X114) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine if there is any abnormality, board radio fraud monitoring processing (step X114) for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining if there is any abnormality A monitoring process (step X115) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X116) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and the timer interrupt processing ends.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require an instruction to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a starting opening 1 (first starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, in the hardware random number acquisition process, it is determined whether or not there is starting opening winning information set when a jackpot random number is obtained based on winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493).

Based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36, when the starting opening winning information is not set (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. Incidentally, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set. On the other hand, if the starting opening winning information is set based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state (step X494). If the game is in the normal game state (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. If the game is not in the normal game state (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X496). After that, prepare a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 1 (step X497), and perform the special figure starting port 1 switch processing (step X498).

In the performance control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the right-handed instruction notification is performed by display, sound, or the like to instruct the player to hit right. During the specific game state or during the special game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the right hand. When winning is detected during a game state, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Next, start port 2 (ordinary variable prize winning device 37) win monitoring table is prepared (step X499), hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X500), and big hit random number is acquired based on the winning to the second start prize winning port 97 It is determined whether or not there is start-up winning information that is set when the game is performed (step X501).

Based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 97, when the starting opening winning information is not set (step X501; N), the process proceeds to step X509. Incidentally, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set. On the other hand, if the starting entrance winning information is set based on the winning to the second starting winning mouth 97 (step X501; Y), the electric power (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, It is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (step X502), and if the normal electric power is in operation (step X502; Y), step X504. transition to On the other hand, if the general electricity is not in operation (step X502; N), it is determined whether the general electricity fraud is occurring (step X503).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

If the electricity fraud is occurring (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X509. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more. Also, if the electricity fraud is not occurring (step X503; N), it is determined whether the game is in the normal game state (step X504). If the game is not in the normal game state (step X504; N), the process proceeds to step X507. In addition, when it is in the normal game state (step X504; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X506). After that, prepare a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 2 (step X507), perform the special figure starting port 2 switch process (step X508), and move to step X509.

Upon receipt of the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs left-handed instructional information for instructing the player to hit left by means of a shooting direction instruction display 99, voice, or the like. When the player is in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit to the left. I am trying to perform a hitting instruction notification.

Next, the starting port 3 (second starting winning port 97) win monitoring table is prepared (step X509), and hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X510). Then, in the hardware random number acquisition process, it is determined whether or not there is starting opening winning information set when a jackpot random number is obtained based on winning to the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning to the second starting opening winning opening 97 (step X511; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Incidentally, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set. On the other hand, if the starting opening winning information is set based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state (step X512). If the game is not in the normal game state (step X512; N), the process proceeds to step X515. Also, when the game is in the normal game state (step X512; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X513), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X514). Thereafter, prepare a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 3 (step X515), perform the special figure starting port 3 switch processing (step X516), and end the starting port switch monitoring processing.

Upon receipt of the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs left-handed instructional information for instructing the player to hit left by means of a shooting direction instruction display 99, voice, or the like. In the normal game state, the left-hand shot is more advantageous for the player, and when the winning is detected in the normal game state at the second start prize-winning port 97 which is designed not to win unless the right-hand shot is won. He is trying to perform left-handed instruction|indication alerting|reporting.

[Special figure start gate 1 switch processing]
FIG. 31 shows the special figure starting opening 1 switch process (step X498) in the starting opening switch monitoring process described above. In this special figure starting port 1 switch processing, first, the number of times of outputting the starting port signal 1, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 36 is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded. (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X523). Then, if the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the value after updating is saved in the starting port signal 1 output count area of RWM (step X524), and the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is less than the upper limit (step X525). On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but if the upper limit is stored, the value after the update is not saved because it loops and becomes 0 due to the +1 update.

If the special figure 1 reservation number is less than the upper limit (here 4) (step X525; Y), set the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the variation pattern in the special figure reservation information determination process described later ( Step X526), update +1 the number of Toku-zu 1 pending (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is calculated (step X528), and the jackpot random number prepared in the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is RWM's jackpot random number Save in the storage area (step X529).

Thereafter, a jackpot pattern random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, a small winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in a small winning symbol random number storage area of RWM (step X532). Subsequently, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, perform special figure reservation information determination processing (step X534), which is a look-ahead process, prepare a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations (step X535), perform production command setting processing ( Step X536), end the special figure starting port 1 switch processing.

It should be noted that the special figure starting opening 2 switch processing (step X508) in the starting opening switch monitoring process described above is, in steps X521 to X524 regarding the starting opening signal, the information on the number of winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the game machine 10 The process is the same as that shown in FIG. 31, except that the starting port signal 2 to be output to the external management device is processed. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, and uses the predetermined random number as the first start memory. It constitutes a first start storage means capable of storing up to an upper limit number.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
FIG. 32 shows the special figure reservation information determination process (step X534) in the special figure start port 1 switch process described above. The same process is performed even in the special figure starting port 2 switch process (not shown). The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory. In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value (step X543). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table is set (step X545), stop pattern information corresponding to the prepared big hit pattern random number is acquired (step X546), A prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value (step X547). ). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), the stop design information for the small hit is set (step X549), and a prefetch stop design command corresponding to the stop design information is prepared (step X551). Also, when the judgment result is not a small hit (step X548; N), set stop design information for losing (step X550), and prepare a look-ahead stop design command corresponding to the stop design information (step X551).

After preparing a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), effect command setting processing is performed (step X552). Next, a special figure 1 information setting process (step X553) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and a special figure 1 variation pattern setting for setting the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game Processing is performed (step X554).

Then, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game (step X555), and perform the effect command setting process. Do (step X556) and end the special figure reservation information determination process. In addition, the special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process in step X554 are the special figure 1 variation start processing of the special figure 1 normal processing, which is executed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game is similar to

By the above processing, including the look-ahead stop pattern command including the result of the special figure 1 variation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory, and the information of the variation pattern in the special figure 1 variation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory A look-ahead variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is the special figure 1 variation based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory It is possible to inform the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the display game, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., and the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the timing.

That is, the game control device 100 can determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before starting the first variation display game based on the first start memory stored in the first start memory means. Form a possible first determination means. In addition, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not a special result will be obtained). determination of whether or not) constitutes a prior determination means. The timing for determining the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

In addition, this special figure reservation information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variation display game, and for the special figure 2 variation display game that does not generate the start memory for suspending the start of the special figure variation display game Not done. Further, when the game is in the third specific game state, the prefetching process may not be performed. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main subject during the third specific game state, and the special figure 1 variation display game is forced by deriving a special result in this special figure 2 variation display game. This is because in most cases, the process is stopped due to the result of deviation. In other words, most of the results are lost, so there is not much meaning in announcing the look-ahead result, and after announcing the look-ahead result that is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is forcibly changed to a lost result. This is because there may be a contradiction between

However, for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, since the start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not generated, during the first period of the 3rd specific game state, as long as there is the first start memory, the special figure There is a high possibility that only one variable display game will be played, and in such a case, a look-ahead effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first starting memory for performing such a look-ahead effect, since the look-ahead processing is performed for the one that occurred before the start of the third specific game state, the result is used to generate after the start of the third specific game state. With respect to those which are the target of such a prefetching effect, the prefetching process is performed. Of course, the prefetching process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined in another process whether or not to perform the prefetching effect based on the result of the prefetching process.

[Special figure start gate 3 switch processing]
FIG. 33 shows the special figure starting opening 3 switch process (step X516) in the starting opening switch monitoring process described above. In this special figure starting port 3 switch processing, first, the number of times of outputting the starting port signal 3, which is the number of times information regarding the number of times of winning to the second starting winning port 97 is output to the management device outside the game machine 10, is loaded. (Step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (Step X562), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (Step X563). Then, when the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting port signal 3 output count area (step X564), and the starting port 3 (second starting winning port 97) wins. Determine if it is invalid.

The starting gate 3 prize winning is invalid, while the special figure 1 variable display game that resulted in a special result (big hit or small win) is stopped (during the special figure display process described later), during the first or second special game state, and The special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. If this starting opening 3 winning prize is invalid (step X565; Y), the special figure starting opening 3 switch processing is terminated. Also, if the starting gate 3 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), set the special figure 2 reservation number to 1 (step X566), calculate the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 (step X567 ), the jackpot random numbers prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process described above are saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

After that, the jackpot pattern random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, a small winning design random number is extracted and saved in the small winning design random number storage area of RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure starting port 3 switch processing is terminated. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as start winning memory means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the second start winning opening 97 . In addition, the variation pattern random number 1 is not used for the special figure 2 variation display game because there are few types of variation patterns.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above. Toku-zu 1 To control the entire process related to the variable display game, to set the display of Toku-zu 1. In this special figure 1 game processing, first, whether the special figure 2 is a big hit/minor win, that is, a special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variation display game becoming a big win or a small win. (step Y101). Then, if the special figure 2 big hit / small hit is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 ( Step Y103). Moreover, when it is during the big hit/minor hit of the special figure 2 (step Y101; Y), it transfers to step Y103.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is monitored for detection by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38, and based on the winning to the big winning opening, the big winning opening switch is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Processing for setting a winning hole count command and processing for closing the big winning hole when a predetermined number of prizes have been won in the big winning hole are performed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game being a big win or a small win is subjected to a special winning opening switch monitoring process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display is performed. As for the special game state that is executed based on the result of the game becoming a big win or a small win, a big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119 and the subsequent processes are performed. In addition, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game process number is performed (step Y107).

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special To perform special figure 1 normal processing (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing processing during FIG. 1 fluctuation. At step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 1, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process, etc. 1 During fluctuation processing (step Y109) is performed.

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, Processing during special figure 1 display (step Y110) for setting fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y111). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if it is the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big winning round is the final round, processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, and special figure 1 processing A big winning hole remaining ball process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the big win end process is performed. At step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", special figure 1 jackpot end processing (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small win are performed. In the small hit fanfare process (step Y115) for setting the information necessary for . At step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", a small hit middle process (step Y116) for setting the information necessary for setting the ending command and performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. conduct.

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls that have won the prize in the big winning opening during processing during the small winning, or ending the small winning Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y117) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small winning end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, prepare a special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step Y119), perform the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step Y120), special FIG. 1 ends the game processing. This special figure 1 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control relating to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game).

[Tokuzu 2 game processing]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game processing, the control of the whole process related to the special figure 2 variation display game and the setting of the special figure 2 display are performed. This special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, whether the special figure 1 is a big hit/minor win, that is, a special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variation display game becoming a big win or a small win. (step Y131). Then, if the special figure 1 big hit / small hit is not in progress (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 ( Step Y133). Moreover, when it is during the big hit/small hit of special figure 1 (step Y131; Y), it transfers to step Y133.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is monitored for detection by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38, and based on the winning to the big winning opening, the big winning opening switch is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Processing for setting a winning hole count command and processing for closing the big winning hole when a predetermined number of prizes have been won in the big winning hole are performed. In the special figure 2 game processing, the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being a big win or a small win is subjected to a big winning opening switch monitoring process, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display is performed. As for the special game state which is executed based on the result of the game becoming a big win or a small win, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152 and the subsequent processes are performed. Also, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already timed up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 is determined (step Y135).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The variable timer value (here, 60,000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variation display game with a high probability of occurrence of small hits in the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state is very long. (for example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variable time is measured by a plurality of times of timing using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of timing for the specified time (here, 60000 ms).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), set the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number in the register (step Y136). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired (step Y137), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is performed (step Y138).

At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", monitor the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game, set the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, set the effect, Performs special figure 2 normal processing (step Y139) for setting information necessary for performing FIG. 2 fluctuation processing. At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 2, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2 A process during fluctuation (step Y140) is performed.

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, Processing during special figure 2 display (step Y141) for setting fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y142). In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if it is the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big winning round is the final round, processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, and special figure 2 processing A large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y144) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end processing. At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small win are performed. In the small hit fanfare process (step Y146) for setting the necessary information, etc., is performed. At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", a small hit middle process (step Y147) for setting the information necessary for setting the ending command and performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. conduct.

At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls that have won the prize in the big winning opening during the small winning medium processing, or ending the small winning Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, prepare a special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step Y152), perform the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step Y153), special FIG. 2 ends the game processing. This special figure 2 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). The above special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that it is not between the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special game state. In addition, it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, but in that case the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , it is not necessary to make a decision here.

If the special figure 1 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 normal processing ends. Also, when the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the instruction to hit left has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. Also, if left-handed instruction notification has not been completed (step Y202; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y204). After that, a left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is designed to be cleared when the second specific game state ends, and thereby the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

And, if the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. Also, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (step Y206; N), prepare a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y207), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y208). After that, perform special figure 1 fluctuation start processing for setting information related to special figure 1 variation display game (step Y210), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to special figure 1 reservation number (step Y211) , effect command setting processing is performed (step Y212). In addition, at the time of performing the processing (step Y210) for preparing the decorative special figure pending number command, the subtraction of the special figure 1 pending number based on the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not performed, and the current special figure 1 pending We are preparing a pending number command corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number minus 1 from the number.

Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variation display game is being performed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. In addition, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 indicates a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. It indicates that there is, and the special figure status 5 indicates that it is the second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is started here, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether it is in the third specific game state (step Y213). And when it is in the 3rd special game state (step Y213; Y), it transfers to step Y216. Also, if it is not in the third specific game state (step Y213; N), the special figure 1 variation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, the special figure 1 variation check flag is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is started in a state other than the third specific game state, and the special figure 1 variation display in the period when the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation It is possible to check the execution of the game. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuating processing transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 usual process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game processing described above. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that it is not between the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that while the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed and the special game state based on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is in a state where fluctuation cannot be started, in that case the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , it is not necessary to make a decision here.

If the special figure 2 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal processing ends. Also, if the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reservations is 0 (step Y222). In addition, as described above, the special figure 2 suspension (second start memory) is based on the winning when there is a prize to the second start winning port 97 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started It is generated temporarily in order to perform the start processing of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and is not for suspending the start of the special figure fluctuation display game like the first start memory.

And, if the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 (step Y222; N), prepare a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y223), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y224). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for setting information on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 fluctuation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y226). Since the special figure 2 variable display game is started here, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not the player is in the normal game state (step Y227). If the game is not in the normal game state (step Y227; N), the process proceeds to step Y230. In addition, when it is in the normal gaming state (step Y227; Y), the special figure 2 variation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 variation check flag is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is started in the period when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes irregular variation. As a result, it can be confirmed that the player is intentionally executing the special figure 2 variation display game that is irregular variation. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuating process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y231). And, if the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y232). Then, if the special figure 1 is not in fluctuation (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y233), and if it is not disclosed (step Y233; N), the customer waiting state Perform settings related processing. Also, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (step Y231; N), if the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y232; Y) or if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step Y233; Y) , the process proceeds to step Y237.

In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y234), a customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235), and a presentation is performed. Command setting processing is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without a backup function loses information on the game state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and it is possible to prevent the transmission of the probability information command based on the change in the game state. It is possible to return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207, Y223). As a result, the effect control device 300 can perform an appropriate effect in accordance with the game state.

Further, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command each time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production corresponding to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. can return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. In addition, the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for returning to the effect corresponding to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step Y209) in the special figure 1 normal processing described above. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. First, the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation pattern discrimination area (step Y241), and the deviation information as the result information of the special figure 1 variation display game , Big hit flag 1 setting processing (step Y242) for setting big hit information or small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern 1 information setting processing (step Y244) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set. (Step Y245).

After that, a special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and variation start information setting for setting information on the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game Processing (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on are determined. And after this, a process for adjusting so as not to cause inconvenience between the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game that can be executed at the same time is performed.

The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time, but when the special result (big hit or small hit) is derived on the one hand, the other is forcibly lost regardless of the lottery result. It ends as a result. In particular, the special figure 2 variation display game has a high probability of becoming a small hit, so if the special figure 2 variation display game stops first, there is a high possibility that such processing will be performed for the special figure 1 variation display game. . Therefore, for example, in the special figure 1 variable display game, even though the performance is highly expected, the game is forcibly stopped as a result of a failure, and the player has a sense of distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variation display game will end before the end of the special figure 1 variation display game that is about to start, measures such as preventing the highly anticipated production from being selected are taken. I am making it possible.

For this reason, first, it is determined whether or not the game is in the third specific game state (step Y248), and if it is in the third specific game state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In the case of the third specific game state, it is a state in which the game proceeds mainly with the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In this state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is short and it is executed at a high frequency, so it is known that the possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped due to a loss is high. , In the special figure 1 variable display game, since it is set in advance so as not to select an effect with a high degree of expectation, no special processing is performed here.

Also, if it is not in the third specific game state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating (step Y249). When special figure 2 is not fluctuating (step Y249; N), it moves to step Y257. In this case, even if the special figure 2 variation display game is started from now on, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game will be a very long variation time. Therefore, since the possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped is low, the processing for preventing the selection of highly anticipated effects is not performed here.

If the special figure 2 is fluctuating (step Y249; Y), it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is lost (step Y250), and if it is lost (step Y250; Y ) goes to step Y257. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped. Also, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is not a loss (step Y250; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. Also, if the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variation display game ends earlier, so that the highly expected effect is not selected. No processing.

Also, if the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 variation display to be executed from now on It is determined whether or not the variation time of the game is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254). If the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game ends first, the processing for preventing the selection of highly expected effects is not performed.

In addition, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; N), it is notified that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer. Prepare a command (step Y255), perform production command setting processing (step Y256), perform support management processing for managing the period for setting general electric support (step Y257), and end special figure 1 fluctuation start processing . This command also includes information as to whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. In the effect control device 300, based on receiving a command notifying that the variable time of the special figure 1 is longer, the selection of the highly expected effect for the special figure 1 variable display game is regulated and the specific execution is performed. It is designed to perform processing such as setting the mode.

In addition, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; N), it is set in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of resetting the information on the variation pattern (first and second half variation pattern number, etc.) may be performed so that the effect control device 300 may change to a variation pattern that does not select the highly anticipated effect. In addition, in the process of resetting the variation pattern, the variation time may be left unchanged or may be changed. In addition, the processing (step Y255) for preparing a command to notify that the variation time of Toku-zu 1 is longer may be performed or may not be performed.

That is, in the special figure 1 variation pattern process (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100, when determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal game state, the second variation display game It constitutes first variation mode determination means capable of determining variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Furthermore, the process of resetting the variation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determining means. is being executed, by referring to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game, information on the variation pattern is obtained without changing the determined variation time of the first variation display game. It constitutes a second variation mode determining means capable of re-determining.

In addition, when determining the variation pattern in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246), instead of changing the variation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246) A process (step Y254) for determining whether or not the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and the variation pattern corresponding to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You can do it.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step Y225) in the special figure 2 normal processing described above. This special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. First, the special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation pattern discrimination area (step Y261), and the deviation information as the result information of the special figure 2 variation display game , Big hit flag 2 setting processing (step Y262) for setting big hit information or small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern 2 information setting processing (step Y264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set. (Step Y265).

After that, the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and the variation start information setting for setting the information of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game Processing (step Y267) is performed, support management processing for managing the period for setting the general electric support is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is terminated.

In addition, in the special figure 2 variation start process, the process for adjusting so as not to cause inconvenience between the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game that can be executed at the same time is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variation display game is low, so the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly ended with a losing result. However, as in the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result, the selection of highly expected effects may be restricted.

[Support management processing]
FIG. 40 shows the support management process (steps Y240, Y260) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this support management process, first, it is determined whether or not the general electric support is in progress (step Y1521), and if the general electric support is not in progress (step Y1521; N), the support management process ends. Also, if the general electricity support is in progress (step Y1521; Y), if the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game as general electricity support is 0, update -1 (step Y1522), support It is determined whether the number of times is 0 (step Y1523).

If the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y1523; N), that is, if the specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure fluctuation display games have not been executed since the end of the special game state (first specific game state or second specific If the gaming state continues), the support management process is terminated. In addition, when the number of times of support is 0 (step Y1523; Y), that is, when the special figure variation display game exceeding the specified number (here, 100 times) is started from the end of the special game state, it is a high probability state. (step Y1524).

If it is not in the high probability state (step Y1524; N), in order to end the second specific game state and shift to the normal game state, first, save the signal related to the time saving end in the external information output data area (step Y1525). . In this case, the big win 2 signal is set to be OFF. Furthermore, a signal regarding the end of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1526). Here, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.

Then, the number of special figure low probability, no time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1527), and the special figure low probability, no support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1528). After that, the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y1529) so that the left-handed instruction notification is performed at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the normal figure low probability is set (step Y1531), and support management End the process. As a result, the second specific game state ends and the normal game state is entered.

On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (step Y1524; Y), save the special figure low probability and no support flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1530), set the normal figure low probability (step Y1531 ), ending the support management process. As a result, the first specific game state ends and the game moves to the third specific game state. In addition, information such as the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs processing such as changing the production mode based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 41 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this big-hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) of RWM and prepared (step Y273), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1).

After that, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2, which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variation display game being executed, is a big hit (step Y275), and if it is a big hit (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. do. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not it is a big hit according to whether or not the obtained big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

Then, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is a big hit (step Y277; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y272 (step Y278 ), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y279) for determining is performed.

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y271. Then (step Y281), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this big-hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of RWM and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to 0.

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1, which is the jackpot decision result of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed, is a jackpot (step Y295), and if it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. do. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. Also, if it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is a big hit (step Y297; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the losing information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298 ), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y299) for determining is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. Then (step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 43 shows the big hit determination process (steps Y276, Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step Y311), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost. Also, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; N), it is judged whether or not it is in a high probability state (step Y313).

Then, if the high probability state (step Y313; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (step Y314), determine whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316 ). Also, if it is not in a high probability state (step Y313; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability (step Y315), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316). .

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment process ends. If the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step Y318), and the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
FIG. 44 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279, Y299) in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Also, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step Y326), and finish the small hit judgment process. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the small prize was lost. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the judgment is about the special figure 1 variation display game. (Step Y322).

And, when the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), set the small hit upper limit judgment value for special figure 1 (step Y323), the value of the target jackpot random number is the small hit upper limit judgment value It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). Also, if the information setting of the special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y322; N), that is, if the determination is about the special figure 2 variation display game, the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). , It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step Y326), and finish the small hit judgment process. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, set a small hit as the judgment result (step Y327), and finish the small hit judgment process. do.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step Y243) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 1 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit pattern random number storage area (reservation number 1 ) to load the jackpot pattern random number (step Y332). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (step Y333), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design save area (step Y334). A jackpot type is selected by this process. In addition, the reason why the stop pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area is when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y335), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design pattern area (step Y336). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (step Y337), and the big winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired. It is saved in the special figure 1 big winning opening information area (step Y338). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit design A small winning design random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step Y340). Next, a special figure 1 small winning design table is set (step Y341), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small winning design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design saving area (step Y342). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design pattern area (step Y343), and the decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step Y346).

Also, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern save area (step Y344), and the loss stop pattern pattern is special figure 1 stop. It is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure 1 command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and production command setting processing (step Y348) is performed. This decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350), and the special figure The 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In addition, the special figure 2 stop design setting process performs the same processing as the special figure 1 stop design setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361). is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step Y363), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is obtained and saved in the special figure 2 stop design save area (step Y364). A jackpot type is selected by this process. In addition, the stop pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area, when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y365), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design pattern area (step Y366). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (step Y367), and the big winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired. It is saved in the special figure 2 big winning opening information area (step Y368). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369), and if it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit design A small winning symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, a special figure 2 small winning design table is set (step Y371), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small winning design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 2 stop design saving area (step Y372). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design pattern area (step Y373), and the decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step Y376).

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern save area (step Y374), and the loss stop pattern pattern is special figure 2 stop. It is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure 2 command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and production command setting processing (step Y378) is performed. This decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit pattern random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit pattern random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. That is, the game control device 100, based on the first start memory stored in the first start memory means, stores the result and the change mode information of the first change display game (special figure 1 change display game) in the first change display game. It constitutes a first decision means capable of making a decision before the start of . In addition, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97, and the result of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the predetermined random number. and second determination means capable of determining the variation mode information before the start of the second variation display game. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

As described above, the first starting winning port 36 is disposed at a position where the game ball launched to one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second starting winning port 97 launches to the other side of the game area 32. and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information on the variable time that can specify the execution time of the variable display game, and in the normal state (normal game state) The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination means is greater than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. It will be a long time.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game Examples include variation commands containing information about patterns. In addition, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole special figure 1 game processing. Furthermore, the game control device 100 constitutes a second variation display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the second variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 transmits the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means as control information. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the production control means (production control device 300). In addition, the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time according to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and when the measured time has passed the variation time It constitutes a measurement means for ending the measurement of the variation time of the variation display game.

In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state, which is a low probability state, is a loss or a small hit, a long fluctuation with a very long fluctuation time is set, but in this case, the fluctuation Information about time may not be transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a command indicating only long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of a long variation, it is only necessary to simply perform a variable display, so there is no need to determine the performance in detail. The variable time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the performance control device 300 based on the end of the variable time, and the variable display is stopped by the performance control device 300 upon receiving the stop command. make it In this way, the burden of control in the production control device 300 can be reduced.

[Special figure 1 change process transition setting process]
FIG. 47 shows the special figure 1 changing process shift setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 normal process. In this special figure 1 process shift setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y603), and the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is set to ON. After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value ( For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). In addition, the initial value is set in the special figure 1 varying pattern number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 varying process transition setting process is terminated.

The initial value to be set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area is 0, so that the fluctuation display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, the start of the variable display can be immediately recognized by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 change process transition setting process]
FIG. 48 shows the special figure 2 changing process shift setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 normal process. In this special figure 2 fluctuation processing shift setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y611), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y612).

Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y613), and the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is set to ON. After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value ( For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). In addition, the initial value is set to the special figure 2 changing pattern number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is completed.

The initial value to be set in the special figure 2 variable pattern number area is 0, so that the variable display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, the start of the variable display can be immediately recognized by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

In addition, when starting the variable display in the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, all the segments are started from the state of turning off, but it is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any of the result modes, or if there is a segment that is not used in any of the result modes, the variable display will be started from at least that segment being lit. You can make it work. Also, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is lit every time. Also, the lighting mode when starting the variation in the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be the same or may be different.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 1 fluctuating process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 fluctuation process, first, + 1 update the number of times the design fixed number of times output (step Y621), prepared by loading the command from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), production command setting process (step Y623).

Next, prepare a decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y624), and perform production command setting processing (step Y625). In the game machine of the present embodiment, since there is a case where it is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, when stopping fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 . Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). Here, the display time is set to 600 ms for a loss, 2000 ms for a big win, and 136 ms for a small win.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is lost (step Y627). If the special figure 1 is lost (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y647. Also, if the special figure 1 is not lost (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

And when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y643. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 display process is in progress (step Y630). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result based on the special result of the special figure 1 variation display game. In addition, even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If special figure 2 is being displayed during processing (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y632. In addition, if the special figure 2 is not being displayed during processing (step Y630; N), the number of times of design determination output is updated by +1 (step Y631), and the special figure 1 display time set above as the special figure 2 display time A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y632). By setting the display time of special figure 1 display time + 4 ms as the display time of special figure 2, the display time of special figure 1 and special figure 2 will end at the same time. In addition, the display time is reset even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, and the display time is newly started.

Next, save the display time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y633), prepare by setting the decorative special figure 2 loss pattern command (step Y634), and put the design command in the decorative special figure 2 command area The game is saved (step Y635), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y636). After that, prepare the decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y637), perform the production command setting process (step Y638), and perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y639).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the winning pattern command area (step Y643), and whether it is a special figure 1 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit is determined (step Y644). If it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y644; Y), the process proceeds to step Y647. Also, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y644; N), that is, if it is a big hit, load information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step Y645 ), the information is loaded from the special figure 1 big winning opening opening information area and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (step Y646).

After that, load the information from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and save it in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y647), perform the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y648), special figure 1 End the display process.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Processing]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 2 fluctuating process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 fluctuating process, first, +1 update the number of times the pattern is fixed and output (step Y651), prepare by loading the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and perform the effect command setting process. (Step Y653).

Next, prepare a decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y654), and perform production command setting processing (step Y655). Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). Here, the display time is set to 600 ms for a loss, 2000 ms for a big win, and 136 ms for a small win.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is lost (step Y657). If the special figure 2 is lost (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if the special figure 2 is not lost (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

And when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; Y), the process proceeds to step Y673. Also, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display process is in progress (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result based on the special result of the special figure 2 variation display game. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If special figure 1 is being displayed during processing (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. Moreover, when special figure 1 displaying process is not in progress (step Y660; N), +1 is updated to the number of output times of design confirmation (step Y661), and the process proceeds to step Y663.

Next, save the display time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), prepare by setting the decorative special figure 1 lost pattern command (step Y664), and put the design command in the decorative special figure 1 command area The game is saved (step Y665), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y666). After that, prepare the decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y667), perform the production command setting process (step Y668), and perform the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step Y669).

Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and save it in the winning pattern command area (step Y673), whether it is a special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit is determined (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, load information from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675 ), the information is loaded from the special figure 2 big winning opening opening information area and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (step Y676).

After that, load the information from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and save it in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678), special figure 2 End the display process.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 1 (step Y648) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In this special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1, first, special figure 1 game process number "2" related to special figure 1 displaying process is set (step Y681), processing number in special figure 1 game processing number area is saved (step Y682).

Next, the signal related to the end of fluctuation in Toku-zu 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 during fluctuation signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684 ), to end the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 fluctuation.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 52 shows the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 1 (step Y678) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In this special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1, first, special figure 2 game process number "2" related to special figure 2 displaying process is set (step Y691), processing number in special figure 2 game processing number area is saved (step Y692).

Next, the signal related to the end of variation of Toku-zu 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step Y694 ), to end the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 2 fluctuation.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 53 shows the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 2 (step Y669) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In this special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number "2" related to the special figure 1 displaying process is set (step Y701), and the process number is placed in the special figure 1 game process number area is saved (step Y702).

Next, save the signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 1 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y704).

Up to this point, it is the same as the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 display described above, and the information for setting the deviation result is performed. First, the deviation stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

Next, clear the special figure 1 big winning opening information area (step Y707), save the deviation information in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and save the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709 ). Then, clear the special figure 1 stop design save area (step Y710), save the deviation stop design number in the special figure 1 stop design area (step Y711), and end the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 .

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the above special figure 1 changing process. In this special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and the special figure 2 game process number area is processed. is saved (step Y722).

Next, the signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then the special figure 2 as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display device 52. The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y724).

Up to this point, it is the same as the process shift setting process 1 during the special figure 2 display described above, and the information for setting the deviation result is performed. First, the deviation stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y726).

Next, clear the special figure 2 big winning opening information area (step Y727), save the deviation information in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and save the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729 ). Then, clear the special figure 2 stop design save area (step Y730), save the deviation stop design number in the special figure 2 stop design area (step Y731), and end the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 .

According to the processing of FIGS. 49 to 54 above, when one of the special figure fluctuation display games becomes the first special result (big hit) or small hit (second special result), the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly played. It will be stopped with a deviation result. That is, based on the special result of the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result, and the special figure 2 variation display game is a special result. As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the result of losing, and the second end control process is performed.

As described above, the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variation display game when performing the execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) whose execution is controlled by the control means (game control device 100) results in a special result, the first variation display game whose execution is controlled can be terminated as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means executes by the first variable display game execution control means when performing the execution control of the second variable display game. When the first variable display game being controlled results in a special result, it is possible to end the second variable display game under control as a result other than the special result. As a result, when a special result is derived in one of the variable display games, the other variable display game can be forced to stop with a losing result, so that even when simultaneous variations are performed, no problems occur. can be

[Special figure 1 display processing]
FIG. 55 and FIG. 56 show the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y752).

Next, the big-hit flag 1 set in the big-hit flag 1 area in the big-hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y753), and the big-hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big win, that is, whether the loaded big win flag 1 is big win information (step Y755), and if it is not a big win (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. In addition, if it is a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal related to the start of the special figure 1 variation display game big hit (special figure 1 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned ON, the role continuous operation device is operated The medium signal is turned on, and the special symbol per 1-per-symbol signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

Then, prepare the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (step Y757), and perform the production command setting process (step Y758). That is, the abnormal fluctuation notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special game state. After that, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y759), the round number upper limit value (10 or 4 in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area. (Step Y760). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y762), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y763). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y765).

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of this embodiment, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y767), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). Then, the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y770), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y771). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774) and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). Furthermore, the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step Y776) is performed, and the process during special figure 1 display ends.

On the other hand, in step Y755, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, when the big hit flag 1 is loss information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). (step Y777). When the small hit flag 1 indicates a small hit (step Y777; Y), a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y783), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y784). Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether the game is in the normal game state (step Y787).

If the game is not in the normal game state (step Y787; N), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned off, and the display instructs the player to hit left.

On the other hand, if the player is in the normal game state (step Y787; Y), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right.

After that, the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y793), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the special figure 1 small winning fanfare medium processing transition setting Processing (step Y797) is performed, and the processing during special figure 1 display ends.

Also, in step Y777, if it is determined that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), clear (information subtraction) during special figure 1 fluctuation of the special figure status area (step Y806), special FIG. 1 usually performs the process transition setting process 1 (step Y807), and ends the process during special figure 1 display.

[Special figure 2 display process]
FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In addition, during this special figure 2 display process, the processing equivalent to the above-described special figure 1 during display process is performed with special figure 2 as the target. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag 2 areas are cleared (step Y812).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big win, that is, whether the loaded big win flag 2 is big win information (step Y815), and if it is not a big win (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. In addition, if it is a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal related to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game big hit (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned ON, the role continuous operation device is operated The medium signal is turned on, and the special pattern 2 winning signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Then, prepare the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (step Y817), and perform the production command setting process (step Y818). That is, the abnormal fluctuation notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special game state. After that, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y819), the round number upper limit value (10 or 4 in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area. (Step Y820). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y823). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y825).

Next, the big prize opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of this embodiment, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

Thereafter, a jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000ms) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y827), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). Then, the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y830), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y831). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y834) and saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y835). Furthermore, the fanfare/interval process shift setting process (step Y836) is performed, and the process during special figure 2 display ends.

On the other hand, in step Y815, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, when the big hit flag 2 is loss information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (step Y837). When the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit (step Y837; Y), a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y843), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether the game is in the normal game state (step Y847).

If the game is not in the normal game state (step Y847; N), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned off, and the display instructs the player to hit left.

On the other hand, if it is in the normal game state (step Y847; Y), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right.

After that, the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y853), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the special figure 2 small winning fanfare medium processing transition setting Processing (step Y857) is performed, and the processing during special figure 2 display ends.

Also, in step Y837, if it is determined that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), clear (information subtraction) during special figure 2 fluctuation of the special figure status area (step Y866), special FIG. 2 usually performs the process transition setting process 1 (step Y867), and ends the process during special figure 2 display.

That is, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the activation of the condition device based on the first special result of the variable display game. a second special game generating means for generating a second special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the conditional device based on the second special result of the variable display game; Eggplant.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
In FIG. 59, the details of the fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y776, Y836) in the processing during special figure 1 display and the processing during special figure 2 display will be described. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the start of the big win (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, the big win 1 signal output in the big win or the small win is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (variation time shortening state of special symbols) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF.

After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special game mode is executed. Save the special figure low probability flag in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state end, and the normal probability state and normal state occur.

Next, save the information during the big hit in the special figure status area (step Y878), save the signal related to the right hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and save the right hitting state in the game state display number 2 area. Save the number (step Y881).

After that, save the release flag in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step Y882), and clear the special figure 2 abnormal number area for storing the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number (step Y883). In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation count area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare/interval processing transition setting process is terminated. That is, along with the occurrence of the big hit, to clear all the information on the special figure 2 abnormal variation.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 60 shows the process shift setting process (step Y797) during special figure 1 small hit fanfare in the process during special figure 1 display described above. In this special figure 1 small winning fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" for small winning fanfare middle processing is set as a processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893). Here, with reference to the current game state, 1000 ms is set as the small win fanfare time in the case of the specific game state, and 4 ms is set as the small win fanfare time in the case of no specific game state. Then, a signal relating to the start of the small win is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, the big win 1 signal output in the big win or the small win is set to ON. Furthermore, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, save the small hit middle information in the special figure status information (step Y896), save the small hit display pointer in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and end the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process. do.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare process transition setting process (step Y857) in the above special figure 2 display process. In this special-figure 2 small-hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process, first, "7" for the small-hit fanfare mid-process is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special-figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

Next, the small winning fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903). Here, with reference to the current game state, 1000 ms is set as the small win fanfare time in the case of the specific game state, and 4 ms is set as the small win fanfare time in the case of no specific game state. Then, a signal relating to the start of the small win is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, the big win 1 signal output in the big win or the small win is set to ON. Furthermore, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special pattern 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, save the small hit middle information in the special figure status information (step Y906), save the small hit display pointer in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and end the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process. do.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
FIG. 62 shows the fanfare/interval process (steps Y111, Y142) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. In this fanfare/interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y951), the information on opening the big winning opening and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y952), and the effect command setting processing is performed. (step Y953).

Next, the initial value of the process control pointer during the big win corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the initial value of the pointer is saved in the process control pointer area during the big win (step Y955). Then, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The open time set here is, for example, 29000 ms.

Next, it is determined whether it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y958), and if it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959 ), and saves the opening time of the big winning opening in the special-figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (step Y962).

Then, the signal relating to the opening start of the big winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y963). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening/closing door 38c of the special variable prize winning device 38, the large prize winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y964), and the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening is counted. The mouth count number is cleared (step Y965), and the fanfare/interval process ends.

[Processing during the opening of the big winning mouth]
FIG. 63 shows the process (steps Y112, Y143) during opening of the big winning opening in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this process during the opening of the big winning opening, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command for the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and effect command setting processing (step Y1008) is performed. In addition, if it is the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command relating to the display control of the ending display screen when the special game state ends is prepared (step Y1007), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1008). I do.

Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the big winning opening open information is set (step Y1009), and 5 for the big winning opening remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). The remaining ball processing time is set to 600 ms, 800 ms or 1400 ms. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1011).

If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step Y1013). On the other hand, if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y1015). After that, the OFF data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening ends.

[Large prize mouth residual ball processing]
FIG. 64 shows the big winning opening remaining ball processing (steps Y113, Y144) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this big winning hole remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1041).

Then, if the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), the signal regarding the end of opening the big winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory in operation signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the current round number is set (step Y1043), and 3 for fanfare/interval processing is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

The interval period between rounds is defined as a period from the end of the round to the elapse of the remaining ball processing time, and from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the elapse of the interval time. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1, the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, so the interval period is 2000 ms, and the interval performance is performed on the display device 41 etc. during this interval period. executed.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), perform the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step Y1045), set the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y1046), 6 for the special figure 1 jackpot end processing or special figure 2 jackpot end processing is set as the processing number (step Y1047).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1048). If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1050), the big winning hole remaining ball processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area ( Step Y1052), the big winning hole remaining ball processing ends.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special game state is a period from the end of the final round until the remaining ball processing time elapses and from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time until the ending time elapses. For example, in the special figure 1 big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1, the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, so the ending period is 11000 ms. executed.

[Jackpot end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 65 shows the big hit ending process transition setting process (step Y1045) in the above-described big winning hole remaining ball process. In this jackpot end processing transition setting processing, first, a signal relating to the end of opening the big winning hole is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory in operation signal is set to OFF.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the big winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step Y1073). ), the information in the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step Y1074).

Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the information in the large winning opening opening information area storing the flag for determining the opening information of the large winning opening is cleared. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the jackpot middle control pointer area for setting the opening/closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the jackpot end processing transition setting processing is terminated.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 66 shows the special figure 1 jackpot ending process (step Y114) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, first, "0" is set as a processing number relating to the special figure 1 normal processing (step Y1101), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1102).

Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1104). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 winning signal and the special symbol 2 winning signal are set to OFF.

Next, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1105), save the fraud monitoring period flag in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1106), and clear the special figure status area (step Y1108). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1109).

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figures 1 and 2, but in the timer interrupt process, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to perform the processing, the processing for starting the special figure fluctuation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing with the timer interrupt that performed the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. will be able to start earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1109, the start processing for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, special figure 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt. That is, the game control device 100 keeps the second variable display game execution control means in the second variable display game execution control means until the first variable display game execution control means can execute the processing related to the start of the first variable display game after the special game state ends. 2. Game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the variable display game from becoming executable.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special result is a variable probability big hit (step Y1110), and if it is a variable probability big hit (step Y1110; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (variation time shortening state of special symbols) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1111). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1112). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal are set to ON.

Next, a high probability number with short working hours is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1114), and a high probability special figure with support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1116). Furthermore, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1117), and the signal regarding the instruction to hit right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1127), and the initial value (here A value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is not a variable probability big hit (step Y1110; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1119). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, a signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1120). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

Next, save the low probability, time saving number in the game state display number area (step Y1122), and save the special figure low probability, support flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1124). Furthermore, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1125), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1127), and the initial value (here A value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 67 shows the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) in the special figure 2 game processing described above. This special figure 2 jackpot end processing is the same processing except that step Y1109 in the special figure 1 jackpot processing described above is not performed. First, "0" is set as the processing number relating to the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y1131), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1132).

Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1133). Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1134). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 winning signal and the special symbol 2 winning signal are set to OFF.

Next, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1135), save the fraud monitoring period flag in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1136), and clear the special figure status area (step Y1138). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special result is a variable probability big hit (step Y1110), and if it is a variable probability big hit (step Y1139; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (variation time shortening state of special symbols) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1140). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal regarding the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1141). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal are set to ON.

Next, a high probability number with short working hours is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1143), and a high probability special figure with support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1145). Furthermore, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1146), and the signal regarding the instruction to hit right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1156), and set the general electric support to the initial value (here A value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 jackpot ending process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is not a variable probability big hit (step Y1139; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1148). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and short working hours state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1149). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

Next, save the number with low probability and short working hours in the game state display number area (step Y1151), and save the low probability and support flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1153). Furthermore, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1154), and the signal regarding the instruction to hit right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1156), and set the general electric support to the initial value (here A value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 jackpot ending process is terminated.

By these special figure 1 jackpot processing and special figure 2 jackpot processing, after the special game state based on the probability variable jackpot ends, the first specific game state with high probability state and general electric support is set. Also, after the end of the special game state based on the normal jackpot, a second specific game state with a low probability state and general electric support is set. That is, the game control device 100, after the end of the special game state, a probability setting that allows a high probability state in which the probability that the result of the game is the first special result among the special results is higher than the low probability state. make a means In addition, the game control device 100 serves as specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game state ends.

[Processing during small win fanfare]
Next, the details of the minor winning fanfare process (steps Y115 and Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in this small hit fanfare mid-process, first, a small hit opening command is prepared (step Y1201), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1202). Next, the signal regarding the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1203). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to ON. Then, the large winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1204), and the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1205).

After that, 8 which is applied to the processing during the small hit is set as the processing number (step Y1206), and it is determined whether or not the small hit type is the small hit 1 (step Y1207). If the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1207; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1208), and the small hit opening time 1 (here, 48 ms) is set to special figure 1. The game is saved in the game processing timer area (step Y1209), and the small winning fanfare processing is terminated.

In addition, when the small hit type is not the small hit 1 (step Y1207; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1210), and the opening time corresponding to the small hit type is the special figure 2 game The game is saved in the processing timer area (step Y1211), and the small winning fanfare processing is terminated. As the opening time corresponding to the kind of small win, 1000 ms for 2 small wins, 1200 ms for 3 small wins, and 1600 ms for 4 small wins are set.

[Small hit middle processing]
FIG. 69 shows small hit middle processing (steps Y116, Y147) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In this small-hit process, first, a small-hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1242). Next, the OFF data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1243), and 9 for small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1244).

After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit type is the small hit 1 (step Y1245). If the small hit type is a small hit 1 (step Y1245; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1246), and the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is specified. The game is saved in the game processing timer area of FIG. 1 (step Y1209), and the processing during the small winning is terminated.

Also, if the small hit type is not small hit 1 (step Y1245; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1248), and the small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type It is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1249), and the processing during the small hit is ended. As the small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type, 600 ms is set for the small hit 2, and 800 ms is set for the small hit 3 or 4.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
FIG. 70 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117, Y148) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271). If it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y1271; Y), set 10 for the special figure 1 small hit end process as the processing number (step Y1272), and set the processing number to the special figure 1 game processing number area Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

Also, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y1271; N), set 10 for the special figure 2 small hit process as the processing number (step Y1275), and set the processing number to the special figure 2 game processing number area Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

Even if it is a special figure 1 or a special figure 2, the setting of the small winning ending time (steps Y1274, Y1277) refers to the current game state, and if it is a specific game state, the small winning ending 1200 ms or 1400 ms is set as the time, and 100 ms is set as the small winning ending time when the game is not in the specific game state. As a result, the length of the ending period, which is the combination of the remaining ball processing time and the ending time, is 2000 ms in the specific game state, and 700 ms or 900 ms in the non-specific game state.

Then, a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory in operation signal is set to OFF. Furthermore, the big winning hole count number area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing ends.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 71 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 for the special figure 1 normal process is set as the processing number (step Y1301), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1302).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small win is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1306 ). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether it is in the normal game state (step Y1307), and if it is not in the normal game state (step Y1307; N), the process proceeds to step Y1310. Also, if the game is in the normal game state (step Y1307; Y), the signal relating to the instruction to hit left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, save the number in the left-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1309), save the value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms as the special figure 2 game wait time value (step Y1314 ), to end the special figure 1 small hit end processing.

By saving the value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms as the special figure 2 game wait time value, the start processing for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, and the special figure 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 72 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 for special figure 2 normal processing is set as a processing number (step Y1331), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1332).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small win is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, save the fraud monitoring period flag in the big winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and clear the special figure status area (step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal game state (step Y1337), and if it is not in the normal game state (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. In addition, when the game is in the normal game state (step Y1337; Y), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-hand hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 73, in the normal game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the normal electric winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the general pattern game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already timed up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. A process of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table in a register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring a branch destination address of a process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number using the table (step B6) is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the general-purpose game processing number (step B7).

At step B7, if the normal pattern game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the normal pattern fluctuation are performed. Normal figure normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the general pattern game processing number is "1", a general pattern variation process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the normal pattern display process is performed.

Further, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "2", if the result of the general pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern opening time is set according to whether or not it is in the time saving state. Or, during the normal map display process (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal pattern per process.
Further, in step B7, if the normal game processing number is "3", the processing during the normal game is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set during the normal game. Processing (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the normal game per end processing is performed.
Also, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "5", general pattern per end processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing general pattern normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display (step B14), the pattern fluctuation control process (step B15 ) to end the general-purpose game process.
On the other hand, in step B4, when the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, when it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (step B8) in the above-described general-purpose game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the general pattern normal processing, first, it is determined whether the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B301), and if the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B201; Y ) performs the general pattern normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step B322), and ends the general pattern normal processing. In addition, if the normal pattern reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), the hit random number, the hit pattern random number and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number are loaded from the RWM random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) (step B302), the random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of a hit result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is set higher than the normal probability (that is, the normal pattern low probability) It is determined whether it is in the normal pattern high probability, that is, in the time saving state (step B304).

If it is not in the normal pattern high probability (step B304; N), set the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the normal pattern low probability (step B305), If it is in the normal pattern high probability (step B304 ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of normal pattern high probability (step B306). After that, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B307). is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B308.

If the value of the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (step B307; Y), or if the value of the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), the winning flag Save the lost pattern information in the area (step B309), set the lost stop pattern number (step B310), save the lost pattern information in the normal pattern stop pattern information region (step B311), set the stop pattern number to the normal pattern stop Save in the pattern area (step B315).

On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the winning information is saved in the winning flag area (step B312), and the winning information loaded in step B302 Set the winning stop pattern number corresponding to the design random number (step B313), save the stop pattern information corresponding to the stop pattern number in the general pattern stop pattern information area (step B314), and set the stop pattern number to the normal pattern stop pattern. Save in the area (step B315).

In the case of this embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of normal pattern low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at the time of normal pattern high probability is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the low probability lower limit judgment value is "251", and the high probability lower limit judgment value is "1". Therefore, when the normal pattern is low probability, the value of the hit random number is "0" to "250". In addition, at the time of normal pattern high probability, the case where the value of the random number is any one of "1" to "250" is hit, and the case where the value of the random number is "0" is lost.

After saving the stop design number in the normal design stop design area (step B315), the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316). Thereafter, the general pattern game mode state and the general pattern variation time corresponding to the general pattern variation pattern random number are saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B317). Then, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B318), the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B319), and the normal figure reservation number is updated by -1 (step B320).

That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the process of advancing the order of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 by one I do. By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done. Then, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 4 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1. Then, the process shift setting process (step B321) is performed during the normal pattern fluctuation, and the normal pattern normal process is terminated. In addition, the result of the normal figure and the variation pattern set by the above process are transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 can execute the corresponding production.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 75 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 75, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is first performed. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), the random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the touch panel 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is an input from the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29, processing for changing performance contents, etc. is performed.

Then, hall/player setting mode processing is performed for setting the changeable range of the brightness of the LEDs and liquid crystals, volume, etc., and receiving operations by the player to change the brightness of the LEDs and liquid crystals, volume, etc. (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and the progress of the presentation including setting of the shooting direction instruction display 99 for instructing the shooting direction of the game ball is controlled. Effect display editing processing (step C13) is performed to edit the drawing command and to set the drawing command preparation end (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system period (1 frame 1/30 second), it is determined that it is time to switch frames when a V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sounds from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration control processing (step C17) for controlling LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44, a board effect setting process (step C20) for controlling the effect, and a process for clearing the WDT (step C8). ).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 76 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands have been received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (step C201). It is determined whether or not the number is 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of commands received has been completed. (step C206). Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, commands (data) can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). If it is determined that the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. Also, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 77 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

If it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Also, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of variation commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during the big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during the small win. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If it is determined at step C237 that the MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of the symbol commands (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbolic command (step C239; Y), symbolic command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as pending number commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include a customer waiting demo command, a pending number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of look-ahead symbol commands (step C243). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

Also, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display. By the processing in the production control device 300 as described above, the production and the like according to the game state on the display device 41 are performed.

Next, a description will be given of how the general/universal map variation display game is executed during the general/universal electric support. FIG. 78 shows the normal figure fluctuation patterns that can be selected during the normal electric support. There are three patterns 1 to 3 in the general pattern fluctuation pattern during general electric support, and one of them is selected based on the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number.

Pattern 1 has a normal pattern fluctuation time of 200 ms and a selection probability of 90%. This pattern 1 has the highest selection probability, and is highly likely to be selected in a plurality of continuous normal pattern fluctuation display games. During the period in which the normal pattern variation display game in which this pattern 1 is selected continues, as described with reference to FIG. Almost all of the game balls that have been played will flow into the normal variable prize winning device 37, and this will be the first zone in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed.

Pattern 2 and pattern 3 are variation patterns with a longer normal pattern variation time than pattern 1. By making it possible to select a time longer than pattern 1, the closing time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is longer than pattern 1, and the game balls can easily flow downstream of the normal variable prize winning device 37. The number of game balls to be played increases, and a winning to the second start winning port 97 occurs at a certain rate during the general electric support, and the second zone becomes possible to execute the special figure 2 variable display game. . That is, the second zone is a zone in which game balls can easily flow downstream of the normal variable winning device 37 from the first zone. Since the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern are transmitted to the production control device 300 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the production control device 300 grasps whether it is the first zone or the second zone. It is possible, and corresponding effects can be set.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, as a transition condition to another game state, it is assumed that the special figure fluctuation display game is executed 100 times, that is, reaching the ceiling. By providing two zones and making it possible to execute the special figure 2 variable display game, it is possible to hasten the achievement of this transition condition.

That is, since the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time increases. In addition, since the special figure 2 variation display game has a high probability of occurrence of a small hit, the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result without waiting for the end of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game. , and the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed per unit time increases. Furthermore, even if the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit is being executed, the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped as a result of losing by deriving a small hit first in the special figure 2 variation display game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a transition to another game state due to the occurrence of a big hit.

As a result, in the case of the first specific game state ST2, the transition timing to the third specific game state ST4, which is more advantageous for the player, is hastened, and the expectation of the player is heightened and the amusement of the game is improved. be able to. In addition, in the case of the second specific game state ST3, the transition timing to the normal game state ST1, which is more disadvantageous to the player, is hastened, and the player's sense of anxiety can be aroused and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Pattern 2 has a normal pattern fluctuation time of 5000 ms and a selection probability of 5%. In this pattern 2, since the normal pattern fluctuation time is long, the closing time of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is long, and there is a possibility of winning the second starting prize opening 97 on the downstream side. The number of special figure 2 variation display games expected to be executed when this pattern 2 is selected is two times. That is, it is expected that the special figure 2 variation display game will be a small hit and the special figure 1 variation display game will be forcibly stopped as a result of losing twice, and a total of 4 special figure variation display games will be performed. is executed in a short period of time, and it is possible to give an effect that the number of games required to reach the ceiling is shortened accordingly. In the open period of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 when the normal fluctuation display game in which the pattern 2 is selected and the normal fluctuation display game results in a specific result, the effect corresponding to the second zone can be executed. As an effect corresponding to the second zone, an effect suggesting that the period until reaching the ceiling is shortened can be executed.

Pattern 3 has a normal pattern fluctuation time of 10000 ms and a selection probability of 5%. It becomes the second zone in the opening period of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 when the normal fluctuation display game in which this pattern 3 is selected and the normal fluctuation display game has a specific result. Like pattern 2, this pattern 3 also has a long normal fluctuation time, so the closing time of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is long, and there is a possibility of winning the second starting prize opening 97 on the downstream side. The number of special figure 2 fluctuation display games expected to be executed when this pattern 3 is selected is 4 times, and 8 special figure fluctuation display games are executed in a short time together with the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Therefore, it is possible to give an effect that the number of games required to reach the ceiling is shortened accordingly.

FIG. 79 shows an example of the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3 as an execution mode of the special figure variation display game during general electric support. In the upper row, zones classified according to the ease with which game balls flow down the downstream side of the normal variable prize winning device 37, the execution mode of the normal pattern variable display game, the operation mode of the normal variable prize winning device 37, and the second start winning are shown. The state of the starting port 2 switch of the mouth 97 is shown, and the execution mode of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game and the operation mode of the special variation winning device 38 are shown in the lower stage. The upper and lower stages follow the same time axis.

In this example, first, the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 ends (t11), the ending time of the win state of the normal pattern ends (t12), and a new normal pattern fluctuation display game is started (t12). ). Pattern 1 is selected in this general/universal pattern variation display game, and a winning result is derived after a short variation time (t12 to t13). After that, after the normal pattern stop time for stop-displaying the result, the normal pattern winning state is entered, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened (t14), closed after a predetermined time (t16), and the normal pattern winning state ends. .

Here, since pattern 1 is also selected for the normal pattern fluctuation display game before this normal pattern fluctuation display game, the first zone continues. During the period in which the first zone continues, the closing time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is short (from t11 to t14), and the game ball reaching the normal variable prize winning device 37 during the closing stays on the movable member 37b. Become. Therefore, the game balls hardly flow down to the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37, and the possibility of winning the game balls to the second start winning port 97 is low, so mainly only the special figure 1 variable display game executed.

After that, a new normal pattern fluctuation display game is started (t17). Pattern 2 is selected for this general/universal pattern variation display game, and a longer variation time is set than pattern 1 (t17 to t23). As a result, the closing time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is lengthened, and the game ball flows down to the downstream side of the normal variable prize winning device 37 and enters the second starting prize winning port 97 (t19). When the variation time of this normal pattern variation display game ends and the winning result is obtained (t23), and when the normal pattern winning state is reached, the normal variation prize winning device 37 is opened (t24). As a result, the game ball does not flow down to the downstream side of the normal variable prize winning device 37, but the game ball that has flowed down to the downstream side before opening enters the second start prize winning port 97 (t27).

When a predetermined time elapses from the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37 is closed (t33), and the winning state of the normal pattern ends (t34). During the period from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display game in which this pattern 2 is selected to the end of the normal pattern winning state based on the normal pattern fluctuation display game (t17 to t33), the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is higher than the first zone It becomes the second zone in which game balls can easily flow downstream, that is, the number of game balls flowing downstream is large, and it becomes a period in which winning to the second start winning opening 97 is possible.

The special figure variation display game can be executed independently of the normal figure variation display game. Since the special figure 1 variable display game can store execution rights as starting memory, it is executed without interruption in most cases in the first zone (t15, t18). The number of remaining games, which is the number of games that can be executed in the specific game state, is subtracted each time this special figure variation display game is started.

As described above, the selection of the pattern 2 causes the winning to the second start winning opening 97 (t19), and accordingly the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t20). The number of remaining games is also subtracted by the start of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game. This special figure 2 variation display game ends with a small hit result earlier than the special figure 1 variation display game being executed ends (t21), and the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result. becomes. As the special figure 2 variable display game stops with a small hit result, the second special game state is entered, and the special variable winning device 38 is opened (t22 to t25). When this second special game state ends (t26), a new special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the starting memory (t26).

During the execution of this special figure 1 variable display game, game balls are newly entered into the second start winning opening 97 (t27), and the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t28). The number of remaining games is also subtracted by the start of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game. The special figure 2 variation display game ends with a small hit result earlier than the special figure 1 variation display game being executed ends (t29), and the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped due to the losing result. As the special figure 2 variable display game stops with the small hit result, the second special game state is entered, and the special variable winning device 38 is opened (t30 to t31). When this second special game state ends (t32), a new special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the starting memory (t32).

In the specific game state, the execution time of the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is lost is 4600 ms, and the second special based on the special figure 2 variation display game from the start of the special figure 2 variation display game that is a small hit The maximum time until the game state ends is 4204 ms. Although it depends on the start timing of the special figure 2 variation display game, the speed of digesting the number of games is approximately doubled compared to when the special figure 2 variation display game is not executed. Thus, by providing a zone in which the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed in the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3, the subtraction of the remaining game number can be accelerated, and the ceiling ( Here, it is possible to shorten the time until reaching 100 games.

Here, by lengthening the normal pattern fluctuation time, the game ball is made to flow down to the downstream side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 so as to have the possibility of winning the second start winning opening 97, but this A game ball may flow down to the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37 by a method other than that. For example, the fanfare time set before the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal pattern stop time and the normal pattern winning state, the ending time set after the opening of all the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal pattern winning state etc. may be lengthened. Also, in the opening pattern of the normal variable prize winning device 37, a closing time may be provided as an interval time so that game balls flow downstream.

When these times are lengthened to flow downstream, the same times may always be set, or these times may be selected by lottery or the like. However, if the probability of selecting a long time that can flow downstream is high, the frequency of winning the special variable winning device 38 in the second special game state based on the small win increases, and the number of balls held increases during the general electric support. Therefore, it is necessary to appropriately set the time setting and frequency in consideration of the structure of the game area 32 and the like.

Techniques other than the above techniques are also conceivable. For example, it is also possible to provide a period during which the normal variable prize winning device 37 is not opened so that many failures occur even during the general electric support. Also, even when the normal variable winning device 37 is open, a certain number of game balls may flow downstream without winning. Also, if a certain number of starting memories can be stored for the special figure 2 variation display game, the starting memory is generated by winning the second start winning opening 97 during execution of the special figure 2 variation display game, and more The special figure 2 variable display game can be executed for the number of times, and the period until reaching the ceiling can be effectively shortened. In this case, the effect corresponding to the second zone may be continued until the starting memory of the special figure 2 variable display game is completely consumed.

FIG. 80 shows an example of display on the display device 41. FIG. FIG. 80(a) shows an example of display in the normal game state ST1. In the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decoration special figure 1 game display section for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game related to a special figure 1 variation display game among the first decoration games constituting the decoration special figure variation display game. 85a is provided. Here, the decoration special figure variable display game is displayed by stopping after the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas. The result is displayed in a result mode composed of a combination of three pieces of identification information, and either a big win, a small win, or a loss is displayed according to the result of the special figure variation display game. In addition, since the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation in the normal game state ST1, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, which is an irregular variation, is not displayed, but is displayed. Also good.

In addition, a first memory display portion 83a for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the first memory display unit 83a corresponds to the first start memory one-on-one, and is displayed in order of memory, and here there are three first start memories. It is shown that. The decoration special figure start memory display of the left end is the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the 1st start memory memorized first, and is designed to shift to the left each time it is digested. In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to each starting memory and the result of the look-ahead such as the variation pattern by the display mode. In addition, in FIG. 80(a), a look-ahead effect is performed to change the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display for the first starting memory in which the digestion order is the first.

On the left side of the first memory display section 83a, there is provided an in-execution memory display section 84 for displaying information on starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. At the start of the special figure variation display game, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the first memory display unit 83a is transferred to the running memory display unit 84, and the result and variation of the special figure variation display game to be executed are displayed. A pattern or the like is suggested by its display mode.

A first starting memory number display portion 86a for displaying the first starting memory number is provided in the upper right portion of the display area. The first starting memory number display section 86a displays the number of first starting memories by numbers, and FIG. 80(a) shows that there are three first starting memories. Also, an effect mode display section 87 for displaying the current effect mode is provided in the upper left part of the display area. Here, the normal mode, ie, the normal game state ST1 is shown.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variation display game is not generated, so the start memory display unit for displaying the second start memory is not provided, but the special figure 2 variation When the second starting memory for deferring the start of the displayed game is generated, the second starting memory is displayed in the same manner as the first memory display section 83a and the first starting memory number display section 86a.

FIG. 80(b) shows an example of display in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3. In the upper right part of the display area of the display device 41, there is a first starting memory number display section 86a that displays the number of first starting memories, and a special figure 1 variation display of the second decoration game that constitutes the decoration special figure variation display game. A second decoration special figure 1 game display section 88a for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game related to the game is provided. In addition, in the lower right part of the display area, the second decoration special figure 2 game display section 88b for displaying the decoration special figure variation display game related to the special figure 2 variation display game among the second decoration games constituting the decoration special figure variation display game. is provided.

In the first start memory number display section 86a, the number of first start memories is displayed numerically, and FIG. 80(b) shows that the number of the first start memories is zero. In the first decoration special figure 1 game display section 85a, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by stopping after the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas. In the second decoration special figure 1 game display section 88a and the second decoration special figure 2 game display section 88b, a decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by stop-displaying after variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information. The result is displayed in a result mode composed of one piece of identification information, and any one of "O" indicating a big hit, "Δ" indicating a small hit, and "X" indicating a loss is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second starting memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not generated, so the second starting memory number display unit for displaying the number of the second starting memory is not provided. , When the second starting memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is generated, the second starting memory that displays the number of the second starting memory in the same manner as the first starting memory number display section 86a A number display should be provided.

The effect mode display section 87 indicates that it is the chance mode, that is, the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3. Here, although it is not clearly indicated which of the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, it may be suggested or notified which game state it is.

In the lower left part of the display area, there is provided a remaining number display section 90 for displaying the number of remaining executions of the special figure variation display game that serves as the general electricity support. 1st specific game state ST2 and 2nd specific game state ST3, from the end of the special game state, by executing the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (here 100 times) to shift to another game state. It can also be said that the display of the remaining number of times display section 90 indicates a period from the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3 to another game state.

In the lower center of the display area, a continuous number display section 96 is provided to display the number of big hits in a specific period which starts when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. This consecutive number display section 96 can be displayed in a game state other than the normal game state ST1. FIG. 80(b) shows that three big hits have occurred.

The condition for starting the specific period is established by deriving a big win in the normal game state ST1, and the condition for ending the specific period is established by returning to the normal game state ST1 from a game state other than the normal game state ST1. Therefore, in principle, the number of consecutive hits displayed in the number of times display section 96 is the number of hits that have occurred until returning to the normal game state ST1, with the first hit being the jackpot in the normal game state ST1 that satisfies the start condition of the specific period. Is displayed.

Also, a shooting direction instruction display 99 for instructing the shooting direction of the game ball is displayed in the lower right part of the display area. As the shooting direction instruction display 99, it is possible to display a display indicating that the ball is right-handed during a special game state in which the game is played right-handed or in a special game state. In addition, when the state is shifted to the state of progressing the game with left-handed, a display indicating left-handed is displayed as the shooting direction instruction display 99 . Note that the shooting direction indicator 99 may not be displayed in some cases.

FIG. 80(c) shows an example of display in the third specific game state ST4. In the upper right part of the display area of the display device 41, there is a first starting memory number display section 86a that displays the number of first starting memories, and a special figure 1 variation display of the first decoration game that constitutes the decoration special figure variation display game. A first decoration special figure 1 game display section 85a for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game related to the game, and a decoration special figure variation display game related to the special figure 1 variation display game among the second decoration games forming the decoration special figure variation display game. A second decoration special figure 1 game display section 88a for displaying is provided.

Also, in the center of the display area, an effect display section 89 is provided for performing an effect display using a character or the like. This effect display unit 89 mainly displays the effect corresponding to the variation pattern and result of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation, and the player can see the progress of the special figure variation display game by the effect display. and the results can be understood.

In the third specific game state ST4, the identification information is not displayed in a large size like the first decoration special figure 1 game display portion 85a in FIG. 80(a), but only when the result is derived You may make it display a mode large. For example, the identification information is enlarged from the first decoration special figure 1 game display portion 85a or the first decoration special figure 2 game display portion 85b corresponding to the special figure variation display game from which the result is derived and is displayed in the center of the display area. Then, when the stop display time ends, the display is performed so that the identification information is reduced in size on the original display unit. Even while performing such a display, the display of the first decoration special figure 1 game display portion 85a and/or the first decoration special figure 2 game display portion 85b is maintained.

The effect mode display section 87 indicates that the game is in the small hit RUSH mode, that is, the third specific game state ST4. Also, in the lower left part of the display area, there is provided a winning ball number display portion 91 that indicates the number of winning balls won in the second special game state during execution of the second special game state. Here, it is shown that 30 prize balls have been obtained in the second special game state. Furthermore, in the lower left part of the display area, the cumulative number of prize balls indicating the number of prize balls obtained from the start of the third specific game state ST4 accompanying the end of the third specific game state ST4 to the transition to the first special game state A display 92 is provided. Here, it is shown that 600 prize balls have been obtained so far.

In addition, the number of winning balls in the first special game state is also added to the total number of winning balls display section 92, and the number of winning balls won from the start of the third specific game state ST4 to the end of the first special game state. may be shown. Furthermore, the number of prize balls obtained in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 is also added, and the number of prize balls obtained from the end of the normal game state ST1 to the return to the normal game state ST1 is indicated. You can do it. However, in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, although there is a fixed number of winning balls, more balls are consumed, so the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3. It is also possible not to add the number of prize balls in .

FIG. 81 shows an example of the effect in the second zone in which pattern 2 or pattern 3, which is a normal pattern variation pattern with a long variation time in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, is selected. In this example, an example of the production along with the example shown in FIG. 79 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), first, the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped in the first zone. When the normal pattern variation display game that becomes the second zone during this stop display time is started (t17 in FIG. 79), as shown in FIG. Ceiling reduction zone!!” is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81(c), the special figure 1 variation display game is started (t18 in FIG. 79), and the first decoration special figure 1 game display section 85a and the second decoration special figure 1 game display section 88a fluctuate. As soon as the display is started, the value of the first starting memory number display section 86a is subtracted. Further, in the remaining number display section 90, instead of displaying the number of remaining games, the subtraction value of the number of remaining games by the special figure variation display game started in the second zone is displayed. Here, "-1 game" is displayed with the start of the special figure 1 variable display game.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81(d), the special figure 2 variation display game is started during execution of the special figure 1 variation display game (t20 in FIG. 79), and the variation display is performed in the second decorative special figure 2 game display section 88b. is started. In the remaining number display section 90, "-2 game" is displayed with the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. After that, as shown in FIG. 81(e), the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped as a result of losing as the special figure 2 variation display game stops as a result of a small hit (t21 in FIG. 79). In the first decoration special figure 1 game display part 85a and the second decoration special figure 1 game display part 88a, the losing result mode is stopped and displayed, and in the second decoration special figure 2 game display part 88b, the result mode of the small hit is displayed. be.

Although illustration is omitted, when the second special game state based on this small hit ends and the special figure 1 variation display game is started (t26 in FIG. 79), the display of the remaining number display unit 90 is "-3 game ”, and when the special figure 2 variation display game is started during execution of this special figure 1 variation display game (t28 in FIG. 79), the display of the remaining number display section 90 becomes “-4 game”. As shown in FIG. 81(f), this special figure 2 variation display game is stopped as a result of a small hit, and the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped as a result of losing (t29 in FIG. 79).

When the second special game state based on this small hit ends, the special figure 1 variation display game is started (t32 in FIG. 79) as shown in FIG. ”. During the execution of this special figure 1 variation display game, the normal figure variation display game that becomes the first zone is started, and the second zone ends (t34 in FIG. 79). Along with this, the remaining number display unit 90 performs an effect of displaying the subtraction value shown in the zone notification display 93 superimposed on the state of displaying the number of remaining games before the start of the second zone, as shown in FIG. 81(i). The number of remaining games after subtraction is displayed as follows. By performing such an effect, it is possible to effectively notify that the number of games to reach the ceiling has been shortened by the second zone.

From the above, the game area 32 is provided in which the game ball can flow down, and the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening provided in the game area 32, and the result of the game is a special result. In this case, a game machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player is provided with game control means (game control device 100) for overall control of the game. Equipped with a normal variable prize winning device 37 which can be converted into a closed state in which balls cannot win prizes and an open state in which game balls can easily win prizes, and a second start prize winning port 97 forming a start prize winning port, and a normal variable prize winning device. The device 37 and the second starting prize winning port 97 are arranged on the same flow path of the game ball so that they can be aimed at at the same time, and the game control means sets the operation state of the normal variable prize winning device 37 to the first operation state. , or a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state, and in the case of the second operating state, the first zone and the second zone are set to satisfy a predetermined condition. It is possible to switch based on Therefore, even in the game state (specific game state), which is the first action state, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous due to changes, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Also, the second zone is easier to flow to the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37 than the first zone. In addition, the number of game balls flowing downstream of the normal variable winning device 37 is larger in the second zone than in the first zone. Also, in the second zone, winning in the normal variable prize winning device 37 is more difficult than in the first zone. Therefore, even in the game state (specific game state), which is the first action state, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous due to changes, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the game control means executes a normal pattern fluctuation display game in which the identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined fluctuation time based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition and then stops, and the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is the specific result. When it becomes, it is configured to convert the normal variable winning device from the closed state to the open state, and the variation time of the normal pattern variation display game in the second zone is longer than the variation time of the normal pattern variation display game in the first zone It means that it was made to be long. Therefore, the period during which the normal variable winning device 37 is in the closed state in the second zone can be lengthened, and the flow to the downstream side from the first zone can be facilitated.

In addition, the game control means executes the first game as a game based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and the second game as the game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97. It means that it was made to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the type of the game to be executed from changing due to the difference in the ease with which the game balls flow down to the downstream side of the normal variable prize winning device 37, and to prevent the game from becoming monotonous due to variations in the game. can be improved.

Further, the game control means can simultaneously execute the first game and the second game, the special results include the first special result and the second special result, and the probability that the result of the game will be the first special result is calculated. , the probability is the same in the first game and the second game, and can be set to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state, and the result of the game is the second special result. is the same probability in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, and when the first game and the second game are being executed, one game will be the second special result, and the other game This means that the game of 1 is stopped by the result of losing. Therefore, the game becomes monotonous due to variations in the type of game to be executed and whether or not the games are executed at the same time, depending on the difference in the ease with which the game balls flow down to the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37. can be prevented, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Also, since the other game is stopped due to a losing result, it is possible to speed up the completion of the game.

In addition, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is located upstream of the second start prize winning port 97, the probability that the second game will result in the second special result is higher than the first game, and the game control means is in the special game state. It is possible to set a first game state to be the first operation state after the end, and the second operation state is set based on the execution of the game for a predetermined number of times without deriving the first special result in the first game state. This means that the game state is shifted to the second game state. Therefore, whether or not the games are executed at the same time changes depending on the ease with which the game balls flow down to the downstream side of the normal variable prize winning device 37, and the length of the period until the transition of the game state can be changed. can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Note that if the result of the other variable display game becomes the second special result during the execution of one variable display game and the second special game state is executed, the variable time of the other variable display game ends. Then, when the second special result is stopped and displayed, one of the variable display games is forcibly stopped with a losing result, but the stop display time of the other variable display game ends and the second special game state is reached. When is started, one of the variable display games may be forcibly stopped with the result of losing.

Further, when the result of the other variable display game becomes the second special result during the execution of one variable display game and the second special game state is executed, the variable time of the other variable display game ends. Then, one of the variable display games may be interrupted from when the second special result is stop-displayed to when the second special game state ends. Also, one variable display game may be interrupted from the time when the stop display time of the other variable display game ends and the second special game state is started until the second special game state ends.

In addition, the start time of interruption or forced stop may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the time when the special result is stopped and the time when the special game state is started may be selected. You can do it. Furthermore, the start time of interruption or forced stop is not limited to when the special result is stop-displayed or when the special game state is started, and may be started at other timings. The end of the interruption may also be at a timing other than the end of the special game state. Also, the interrupted state may be generated when the result of one variable display game becomes the first special result and the first special game state is executed while the other variable display game is being executed. In addition, for each of the special figures 1 and 2, when the first special result or the second special result is derived, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether it is interrupted or forced to stop.

Next, the display mode of the shooting direction indication display 99 will be described. FIG. 82 shows an example of the display mode of the shooting direction instruction display 99 that instructs hitting to the right. The shooting direction indication display 99 is an animation display that changes at a constant cycle. The launch direction indication display 99 shown in FIGS. 82(a) to (c) changes from a display with one arrow as shown in FIG. 82(a) to a display with two arrows as shown in FIG. 82(b). Then, as shown in FIG. 82(c), three arrows are displayed, and the animation display returns to the display of FIG. 82(a). The display time for each display in FIGS. 82(a) to (c) is a predetermined time, and the time for one cycle until the display returns to the same display is always constant.

82(d) to (f) show another example of the firing direction indication display 99. FIG. In this shooting direction indication display, an animation is displayed in which the rightward arrow gradually lengthens and then returns to its original length. The arrow may change continuously or step by step, but the time required for one cycle to return to the same display is always constant. 82(g) to (i) also show another example of the firing direction indication display 99. FIG. In this shooting direction indication display, animation display is performed in which the color inside the rightward arrow changes toward the right. The color change may be continuous or stepwise, but the time required for one cycle to return to the same display is always constant.

FIG. 83 shows an example of the display mode of the progress of the game and the shooting direction indication display 99 . In the example shown in FIG. 83(a), first, the state is a normal game state ST1 in which the game progresses with left-handed hitting. In this state, the launch direction indicator 99 is not displayed. When the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit and the first special game state is entered in which the game is played by hitting to the right (t51), a shooting direction instruction display 99 for instructing to hit to the right is started. The display modes a, b, and c respectively mean the displays in (a), (b), and (c) of FIG. When starting the shooting direction indication display 99, the display of a is started. Of course, it is possible to start from the display of b or c, always start from the same display, or start from a display selected according to a fixed rule or at random.

During the first special game state, displays a, b, and c are repeatedly displayed at a constant cycle. This cycle is maintained unchanged whether fanfares, rounds, intervals or endings start or end, or whether the special variable winning device 38 is opened or closed. Then, when the first special game state ends, the first specific game state is started (t52). The first specific game state is also a state in which the game is progressed by hitting to the right, and the shooting direction does not change before and after the change in the game state. In this case, in the shooting direction indication display 99, the period displayed in the first special game state is maintained, and here, b is displayed across the first special game state and the first specific game state. continues, and changes progress without breaking the cycle.

Stop (t53), end (t54), start (t54) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the first specific game state, start (t55), stop (t56), end (t57) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, Even if the small hit result is derived (t56) and the other special figure variation display game is forced to stop (t56) due to the small win result derivation, the cycle of change of the launch direction indication display 99 is maintained. In addition, the start (t56) and end (t59) of the second special game state based on the small win generated in the first specific game state, the opening (t57) and closing (t58) of the special variable winning device 38, the second special game The period of change of the firing direction indicator 99 is maintained even with fanfares, rounds, intervals and endings at the start and end of the state.

Then, when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first specific game state, it shifts to the third specific game state (t60). The third specific game state is also a state in which the game is played right-handed, and the shooting direction does not change before and after the change in the game state. In this case, in the shooting direction indication display 99, the period displayed in the first specific game state is maintained, and here, the display of c across the first specific game state and the third specific game state continues, and changes progress without breaking the cycle. Also, the display position of the shooting direction instruction display 99 changes between the display in the first specific game state shown in FIG. 80(b) and the display in the third specific game state shown in FIG. 80(c). However, even if there is such a movement of the firing direction indicator 99, the cycle of the cycle display is maintained.

Start (t60) and stop (t62) of the special figure 1 variation display game in the third specific game state, start (t61, t65), stop (t62, t66), end (t63, t67) of the special figure 2 variation display game , the derivation of the small hit result (t62), and the forced stop of the other special figure variation display game due to the derivation of the small hit result (t62), the cycle of change of the shooting direction indication display 99 is maintained. In addition, the start (t62) and end (t65) of the second special game state based on the small win generated in the third specific game state, the opening (t63) and closing (t64) of the special variable winning device 38, the second special game The period of change of the firing direction indicator 99 is maintained even with fanfares, rounds, intervals and endings at the start and end of the state.

In addition, when maintaining the cycle of change of the firing direction indication display 99, it is not limited to the above. Also at the timing of moving or shrinking the first decorative special figure 1 game display portion 85a displayed in the center, the cycle of change of the firing direction instruction display 99 is maintained. Furthermore, in the middle of the special figure variation display game, a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed for a predetermined period of time in the special figure variation display game and then temporarily stopped. The period of change of the firing direction indication display 99 is maintained even at the timing of temporarily stopping the identification information in the continuous change display mode and the timing of starting the change again.

FIG. 83(b) shows an example of a display mode when the shooting direction indication display 99 is temporarily hidden. In this example, the shooting direction instruction display 99 is temporarily hidden during execution of the special figure variation display game (t82-t83). Even during the period in which the firing direction indication display 99 is not displayed in this way, the period of change of the firing direction indication display 99 is maintained as shown by the display mode indicated by the dotted line. Then, when it is redisplayed (t83), it is redisplayed from the state according to this cycle.

In the example shown in FIG. 83(b), the special figure 1 variable display game in the first specific game state was taken as an example, but it is not limited to this, and the firing direction instruction display 99 is temporarily displayed during the period when the firing direction does not change. is applicable to all cases where the is hidden. Moreover, it is also applicable to a case where the shooting direction indicator 99 is hidden due to a change in the shooting direction, and then the shooting direction indicator 99 starts to be displayed when the shooting direction changes again.

FIG. 84 shows an example in which the firing direction indicator 99 moves. In this example, it is in the first specific game state or the second specific game state, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game ends as shown in FIG. 84 (a), and a new game as shown in FIG. A special figure 1 variable display game has been started. After that, as shown in FIG. 84(c), it becomes an N reach state, and develops into an SP reach state as shown in FIG. 84(d).

Along with the development of this SP reach, the shooting direction indication display 99 is moved to the upper center of the display area and the display mode is changed to a line form. Even if there is such a movement or change in form, the cycle of the firing direction indicator 99 is maintained. After that, as shown in FIG. 84(e), when the SP ready-to-win effect progresses, the shooting direction indication display 99 is temporarily hidden, and as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 84(g), the SP ready-to-win effect is completed, and the original display mode is restored to show the result mode of the losing result.

As the original display mode is restored, the shooting direction indication display 99 is displayed again. The display position and form at this time are different from the position and form before non-display shown in FIG. 84(d). That is, the display position and form of the firing direction instruction display 99 before being hidden are different from the display position and form of the firing direction instruction display 99 after being redisplayed. Even if there is such a movement or a change in form, the period before the non-display is maintained even after the re-display, in the same manner as described with reference to FIG. 83(b).

In this example, the development to the SP reach was explained as an example, but the movement or change in form of the shooting direction indication display 99 may be performed on other occasions. Try to maintain the cycle before and after . Also, only one of the movement and the change of form may be performed, and in this case as well, the cycle is maintained. In addition to movement and change of form, the display area of the shooting direction indication display 99 may be enlarged or reduced, and in this case as well, the cycle is maintained.

As described above, the cycle of the firing direction indication display 99 is maintained regardless of changes in the game state and the progress of the special figure variation display game. It becomes clear that the progress status of the game and the progress of the figure fluctuation display are independent. The firing direction indication display 99 that has changed periodically ends the previous periodic display in response to a change in the game state or some kind of change in the special figure variation display game, and is newly displayed periodically. If the display is started, there is a risk that it will be perceived as an instruction to start firing from the trigger. In other words, there is a risk that the firing direction indicator 99, which indicates the firing direction, may be misunderstood as indicating the firing timing. However, by maintaining the cycle of the launch direction indication display 99, such misunderstanding can be prevented.

From the above, the game area 32 is provided in which the game ball can flow down, and the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening provided in the game area 32, and the result of the game is a special result. In this case, in a gaming machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player, control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for controlling the game, and a display device 41 capable of displaying information on the game are provided. The game area 32 is provided with a game area on one side and a game area on the other side. The control means can select whether to let the ball flow down, the control means can set one game state from among a plurality of game states, and the game state is shifted based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition. For each game state, it is predetermined to which of the game area on one side or the game area on the other side the game ball is shot to progress the game, and the game ball is shot according to the game state. When the shooting direction instruction display 99 for instructing the direction can be displayed on the display device 41, and when the shooting direction instruction display 99 can be displayed periodically so as to change at a constant cycle, and the game state does not change, the game The cycle of the cycle display is maintained regardless of the execution state of . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the shooting direction indicator 99 instructing the shooting direction indicates the shooting timing, thereby ensuring the fairness of the game.

Further, the control means can redisplay the firing direction indication display 99 after hiding it in a period in which the game state does not change, and the period of the periodic display before hiding is maintained even after redisplaying. It means that it was made to be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the shooting direction indicator 99 instructing the shooting direction indicates the shooting timing, thereby ensuring the fairness of the game.

Further, the shooting direction indication display can be displayed at different positions within the display area of the display device 41, and the period of the periodic display can be maintained even if the display position is changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the shooting direction indicator 99 instructing the shooting direction indicates the shooting timing, thereby ensuring the fairness of the game. Also, it can be said that the shooting direction indication display can be moved within the display area of the display device 41, and the period of the periodic display is maintained before and after the movement. In addition, it can be said that the firing direction indication display can be displayed in different display modes, and the period of the periodic display is maintained even if the display modes are changed.

Further, the control means can redisplay the shooting direction indication display 99 after hiding it in a period in which the game state does not change, and the display position of the shooting direction indication display before hiding and the Even if the display position of the shooting direction indication display after display is different, the period of the periodic display before the non-display is maintained even after the display is redisplayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the shooting direction indicator 99 instructing the shooting direction indicates the shooting timing, thereby ensuring the fairness of the game.

In addition, although the right-handed shot instruction notification for instructing the right-handed shot is shown as the shooting direction instruction display 99, the left-handed shot instruction notification for instructing the left-handed shot can be performed in the same manner. In addition, the period of the firing direction indication display 99 is maintained for all of the triggers such as changes in the game state and some changes in the special figure fluctuation display game, but for some triggers, a new periodic display is made. You can start it.

In addition, the initial display (in the above example, the display of a) displayed at the start of the shooting direction instruction display 99 is triggered by a change in the game state or some kind of change in the special figure fluctuation display game. may be avoided. Depending on the cycle of the periodic display, there is a possibility that these triggers coincide with the display start timing of the initial display unintentionally. In such a case, the display start timing of the initial display may be shifted. For example, the display start timing of the initial display is delayed by slightly lengthening the display time of the display before the initial display (the display of c in the above example).

Also, the shooting direction indication display 99 may be displayed at a plurality of locations at the same time, and these periodic displays may be synchronized. Synchronizing the plurality of shooting direction indication displays 99 means, for example, that when the plurality of shooting direction indication indications 99 change step by step, the display mode shifts to the next step at the same time. Also, the time required for one cycle of the cycle display may be the same.

In addition, the plurality of shooting direction indication indications 99 may be displayed in the same display mode at a plurality of locations. In this case, they may have the same size or different sizes. Also, different display modes may be displayed at a plurality of locations. For example, a plurality of shooting direction indication displays 99 having different display modes as shown in FIG. 82 may be displayed.

In addition to the shooting direction indication display 99 displayed on the display device 41, another display device may be used to indicate the shooting direction, or a lamp may be provided to indicate the shooting direction. Furthermore, the shooting direction may be indicated by a moving accessory. In this case as well, the periodic display of the launch direction indication display 99 displayed on the display device 41 may be synchronized with the display mode, lamp lighting mode, and action mode of the character on the other display device.

In addition, when performing periodic display that changes periodically in the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, it may be synchronized with the periodic display of the launch direction instruction display 99. In addition, the period display in the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 is the same as the case described above, and the period of the period display is maintained regardless of the change in the game state or the non-display state. You can do it.

In addition, suggestions or notifications regarding games may be made by changing the display mode, such as breaking the cycle of the display of the shooting direction indication display 99 . By breaking the cycle of the cyclic display of the shooting direction indication display 99, it is possible to create an uncomfortable state that deviates from the routine state of the cyclical display impressed on the player, and this uncomfortable state suggests or informs the player of the game. be able to. The contents of the suggestion or notification may be of any kind, but the result or variation pattern of the special figure variation display game being executed may be suggested or notified, or the look-ahead result of the starting memory may be suggested or notified. You can do it. In addition, when it is possible to select and set the derivation probability of a special result from a plurality of types of set probability values by operating the operation means provided in the game machine, the set probability set value is suggested or notified. You can make it work.

Also, the first decoration special figure 1 game display portion 85a, the second decoration special figure 1 game display part 85b, the second decoration special figure 1 game display part 88a and the second decoration special figure 2 game display as shown in FIG. In the section 88b, the interval at which the identification information changes does not coincide with the interval at which the display of the firing direction indication display 99 changes, so that the special figure variation display game and the firing direction indication display 99 are not considered to be interlocked. You can do it. For example, the interval at which the identification information changes when the variable display is performed at a low speed before the stop or temporary stop and the interval at which the display of the launch direction indicator 99 changes do not match. Also, the period of shaking when the identification information is displayed so as to shake during temporary stop is the interval until the display changes to the next display in the firing direction instruction display 99, and the display changes to the display a predetermined number ahead. The interval or display may not coincide with the period of one cycle. Similarly, the display change interval of the special figure display device in the collective display device 50 provided on the game board may not coincide with the display change interval of the shooting direction instruction display 99 .

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment, and may be other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the modifications described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

10 game machine 32 game area 37 normal variable winning device (start winning opening)
97 2nd starting prize opening (starting prize opening)
100 game control device (game control means)

Claims (2)

Equipped with a game area where game balls can flow down, a game is executed based on the winning of game balls into the start winning opening provided in the game area, and if the result of the game is a special result, the player In a gaming machine that generates an advantageous special game state,
Equipped with game control means for comprehensively controlling the game,
In the game area,
A normal variable prize winning device that forms the starting prize winning port and can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize;
and a second start prize opening forming the start prize opening,
The normal variable winning device and the second starting winning port are arranged on the same flow path of the game ball so that they can be aimed at the same time, and the normal variable winning device is on the upstream side of the second starting winning port. located in
The game control means is
executing a first game as the game based on the winning of a game ball to the normal variable winning device;
executing a second game as the game based on the winning of the game ball into the second start winning port;
The first game and the second game can be executed simultaneously,
The special results include a first special result and a second special result,
The probability that the result of the game will be the first special result is the same probability in the first game and the second game, and is either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state. can be set to
The probability that the result of the game will be the second special result is the same probability in either the low-probability state or the high-probability state,
when the first game and the second game are being executed, one game is stopped with a losing result based on the second special result of the other game;
The second game has a higher probability of the second special result than the first game,
A normal pattern variation display game is executed in which the identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined variation time and then stopped based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a specific result, the normal variation configured to transform the winning device from the closed state to the open state;
The operating state of the normal variable winning device can be set to either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than in the first operating state,
when the high-probability state is the second operation state, switching between the first zone and the second zone is possible based on the establishment of a predetermined condition ;
In the second zone, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning port than in the first zone,
The variation time of the second game, which is the second special result in the high probability state, is longer than the variation time of the normal pattern variation display game in the first zone, and the variation time of the normal pattern variation display game in the second zone. A game machine characterized by shortening a variable time . The game control means is
A first game state can be set as the second action state after the special game state is finished, and the game is executed a predetermined number of times without deriving the first special result in the first game state. 2. The game machine according to claim 1 , wherein the game machine shifts to a second game state , which is the first operation state, based on the above.

Images